the user manual for tf5000pvrt...
TRANSCRIPT
TOPFIELD
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
User Guide
Digital Terrestrial ReceiverPersonal Video Recorder
iii
Digital Broadcasting Australia
Dear customerDigital Broadcasting Australia (DBA) congratulates you on yourdecision to purchase a digital receiver set-top box
Digital Broadcasting Australia is made up of the free-to-airtelevision stations consumer electronic suppliers manufac-turers and retailers Together we want to ensure the smoothestpossible transition to digital for viewers and consumers Youcan find out more about DBA by visiting our web site httpwwwdbaorgau
As you are one of the first to experience the unique benefits ofdigital television in Australia we are inviting you to join theDBA Early Adopter Club
Membership of the DBA Early Adopter Club is completely freeSome of the benefits of membership include
bull Receiving regular updates about digital television in Aus-tralia
bull On-line access to member-only international news on
iv
digital television developments
You can also provide vital feedback on the features of digitaltelevision you like and donrsquot like in occasional on-line surveysmdashso you can help shape digital television in the future
To register as a member of the DBA Early Adopter Club pleaseenter your contact details on the registration web page at httpwwwdbaorgauregisterasp You will then receive a con-firmation of your membership and a sign-on password
We look forwarding to welcoming you to the DBA Early AdopterClub
Tim OrsquoKeefeDigital Broadcasting Australia
v
Contents
Contents v
1 Introduction 1
11 Introduction 1
12 Controlling the digital receiver 3
121 The front panel 3
122 The remote control 4
2 Installation 7
21 Packing contents 7
22 Safety precautions 7
23 Rear panel connections 10
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
3 Preference Settings 14
31 Language settings 14
32 Video and audio settings 15
321 Televsion standard 16
322 Color model 16
vi CONTENTS
323 Video cassette recorder 17
324 Television aspect ratio 18
325 Sound mode 19
326 RF output 19
33 Local time setting 20
34 Parental control 22
35 Adjusting on-screen display 24
36 Enabling the time shift function 24
4 Service Search 25
41 Searching broadcasting services 25
42 Resetting to factory settings 26
5 Daily Usage 27
51 Browsing services 27
52 Viewing program information 29
53 Viewing an electronic program guide 30
54 Selecting an audio track 31
55 Selecting a subtitle track 32
56 Viewing a teletext 32
57 Selecting a multifeed service 32
58 Watching by time shift 33
59 Watching by picture in picture 34
6 Listing Services 35
7 Recording and Playing Back 38
71 Recording a program 39
711 Immediate recording by the remote control 39
vii
712 Making a timer recording 40
713 Recording by electronic program guide 42
714 Recording when using time shift 43
72 File list 44
73 Playing back a recording 46
731 To play back in slow motion 47
732 To play back in fast motion 47
733 To play back recordings in sequence 48
734 To make a bookmark 48
735 To play back a recording repeatedly 49
74 Editing a recording 50
741 To erase a block from a recording 50
742 To store a block from a recording 50
75 Playing a MP3 51
76 Formatting hard disk 52
8 Topfield Application Program 53
9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer 55
91 Updating the firmware 56
92 Transferring the receiver data 58
93 Transferring recording files 59
Index 60
1
Chapter 1
Introduction
11 Introduction
The TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece digital receiver is fully compli-ant with the international Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB)standard and can receive digital broadcastings To operate ityou need an antenna which must be installed appropriately
Unlike analog broadcastings digital broadcastings are not allassigned to their own frequencies 1instead several televisionand radio broadcastings are transmitted through a single trans-ponder on a single wideband carrier
NOTE A transponder is in fact a wireless device which re-ceives and transmits radio signals at a prescribed fre-quency range You may regard a transponder as achannel One channel has one broadcasting in ana-log broadcast on the other hand one transponder hasseveral broadcastings in digital broadcast So the wordservice is used instead of channel to indicate a broad-casting in this document
To help you with the choice and setting for broadcasting ser-
2 Introduction
vices a selection of television and radio services have alreadybeen programmed for you So all broadcasting services thathave gone on air are available to you You can find the latesttransponder information from various broadcasters on tele-text
The TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece digital receiver has features asfollows
bull The digtial receiver is able to memorize up to 2000 tele-vision and radio services
bull Electronic Program Guide (EPG) provides an overviewof program schedules for next few hours
bull You can edit the service list and make your own favoriteservice list
bull You can view the information of a current television orradio program
bull You can update the firmware of the digital receiver tothe latest which will be provided by Topfield
bull The digital receiver features a digital video recorder withtwo tuners with which you can record your choice ofbroadcasting services independently of ones you are cur-rently watching
bull The large storage capacity of the built-in hard disk al-lows you to record up to 40 hours of materialmdashin caseof 80 gigabytesmdashin excellent picture and sound quality
bull Time shift function is a special technical feature Youcan pause the program you are watching and resume itagain at a later time You can quickly find whatever partof the current program by reverse or forward search
bull During a recording in progress you can select a differentprogram from the archive and watch it
12 Controlling the digital receiver 3
12 Controlling the digital receiver
You can control the digital receiver with the remote controland the front panel buttons
NOTE When the digital receiver is off but plugged to a walloutlet we say that it is in standby mode on the otherhand when it is on it is in operation mode You shouldkeep the digital receiver plugged to a wall outlet so asit can run timer events
121 The front panel
STANDBY button toggles the digital receiver between oper-ation mode and standby mode
CHANNELac buttons switch to another service and movethe highlight bar vertically in a menu
VOLUMEbd buttons change the volume and select anoption in a menu
Status display displays a current time in standby mode anddisplays a current status of the digital receiver in op-eration mode
4 Introduction
122 The remote control
1⃝ button toggles the digital re-ceiver between operation modeand standby mode
2⃝ button mutes the television oraudio appliance
3⃝ currenpound iexclcentUHF button displays the RF set-ting menu For more descrip-tions refer to sect 326
4⃝ button toggles operation be-tween the digital receiver andyour video recorder For moredescriptions refer to sect 323
5⃝ button sets a sleep timer Thedigital receiver is turned off tostandby mode when a specifiedduration is elapsed
6⃝ Numeral buttons are used tospecify a service to watch or a pa-rameter such as timer
7⃝ button makes a return to theprevious service
8⃝ button displays the informa-tion about the program on the air
9⃝currenpound iexclcentGUIDE button displays an electronic program guide
10⃝ button toggles between TV mode and radio mode
11⃝ currenpound iexclcentMENU button displays the menu or escapes to a higherlevel menu out of a submenu
12⃝ button is used to select an audio track a sound mode
12 Controlling the digital receiver 5
or a multifeed if available
13⃝ currenpound iexclcentV+ currenpound iexclcentVminus buttons change the volume and select an op-
tion in a menu
14⃝ currenpound iexclcentP+ currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons switch to another service and move
the highlight bar vertically in a menu
15⃝currenpound iexclcentOK button displays the service list and selects an entryin a menu or list
16⃝ currenpound iexclcentFAV button displays the favorite service list
17⃝ button is used to select a subtitle track if available
18⃝ currenpound iexclcentEXIT button escapes from any menu
19⃝ button displays teletext if available
20⃝ button starts backward playback or backward scan
21⃝ button starts a playback
22⃝ button starts forward scan
23⃝ button starts slow playback
24⃝ button stops a playback
25⃝ button starts a recording
26⃝ button captures a picture from a live show Thisbutton also pauses a playback
27⃝ button moves the position of subpicture counter-colckwise
28⃝ button moves the position of subpicture clockwise
29⃝currenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges a main-picture with a subpic-ture
30⃝ button displays resizes and hides a subpicture
31⃝ button makes a a bookmark during a playback or atime shift
6 Introduction
32⃝ button plays back from a next bookmark position
33⃝ button is used to edit a recording file
34⃝ button displays recording file list MP3 file list orapplication file list For more descriptions refer to sect 74
35⃝ button displays a service list for subpicture or spec-ifies a block for a repeated playback
36⃝currenpound iexclcentNP button is unavailable for this model
If you do not have wide-screen television but normal screentelevision pressing the
currenpound iexclcent0 button changes depending on broad-casting conditions the display format as follows
43 Center Extract rarr 43 Letter Box rarr 169 Full screen
and buttons have additional differentfunctions per menu besides their own function Their func-tions will be guided in the help window on a menu screen
If the remote control does not work please check the remotecontrol mode There are 4 modes with this remote control Youcan alter the mode by pressing two buttons simultaneously asfollows
bull Mode 1 +currenpound iexclcent1
bull Mode 2 +currenpound iexclcent2
bull Mode 3 +currenpound iexclcent3
bull Mode 4 +currenpound iexclcent4
The mode 1 will work at default
7
Chapter 2
Installation
21 Packing contents
Before going any further check that you have received the fol-lowing items with your digital receiver
bull Remote control unitbull Two batteries for the remote control (AAA 15 V)bull One loop cable to link the first tuner with the second
tunerbull One SCART-to-component cable to link the digital re-
ceiver to your television setbull One RCA cable to link the digital receiver to your tele-
vision setbull A copy of this user guide
22 Safety precautions
Please read and keep the following safety precautions care-fully for your safety
bull The power must be 90 to 250 volt Check it before con-
8 Installation
necting the digital receiver to the wall outlet For thepower cunsumption of the digital receiver refer to Ta-ble 21
bull The wall outlet shall be installed near the equipment andshall be easily accessible
bull The digital receiver is designed to receive record andplay back video and audio signals Any other use is ex-pressly prohibited
bull When setting up the digital receiver make sure it is in ahorizontal position
bull Do not expose the digital receiver to any moisture Thedigital receiver is designed for use in dry rooms If youdo use it outdoors ensure that it is protected from mois-ture such as rain or splashing water Do not place anyvessels such as vases on the digital receiver These maybe knocked over and spill fluid on the electrical compo-nents thus bring about a risk
bull Use only dry cloth when cleaning the digital receiver
bull Do not place the digital receiver close to heating units orin direct sunlight as this will impair cooling Place thedigital receiver on a hard level surface Do not lay anyobjects such as magazines on the digital receiver Whenplaced in a cabinet make sure there is a minimum spaceof 10 cm around it For the physical specification of thedigital receiver refer to Table 22
bull Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinchedparticularly at plugs receptacles and the point wherethey exit from the digital receiver
bull Only use accessories specified by the manufacturer
bull Thunderstroms are a danger to all of electrical devicesEven if the digital receiver is switched off it can be dam-aged by a lightning strike to the power line or the an-
22 Safety precautions 9
tenna cable Always disconnect the power plug and theantenna cable
bull Never open the digital receiver casing under any cir-cumstances Warranty claims are excluded for the dam-age resulting from improper handling
bull Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servic-ing is required when the digital receiver has been dam-aged in any way such as power-supply cord or plug isdamaged liquid has been spilt or objects have fallen intothe digital receiver the digital receiver has been exposedto rain or moisture does not operate normally or hasbeen dropped
Table 21 Power specification
Input voltage 90 to 250 V AC 5060 HzPower consumption Running Max 28 W
Standby 10 W
Table 22 Physical specification
Size 430 times 60 times 265 mmWeight 43 kgOperating temperature 0 to 45 degCStorage humidity 5 to 95 RH
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
iii
Digital Broadcasting Australia
Dear customerDigital Broadcasting Australia (DBA) congratulates you on yourdecision to purchase a digital receiver set-top box
Digital Broadcasting Australia is made up of the free-to-airtelevision stations consumer electronic suppliers manufac-turers and retailers Together we want to ensure the smoothestpossible transition to digital for viewers and consumers Youcan find out more about DBA by visiting our web site httpwwwdbaorgau
As you are one of the first to experience the unique benefits ofdigital television in Australia we are inviting you to join theDBA Early Adopter Club
Membership of the DBA Early Adopter Club is completely freeSome of the benefits of membership include
bull Receiving regular updates about digital television in Aus-tralia
bull On-line access to member-only international news on
iv
digital television developments
You can also provide vital feedback on the features of digitaltelevision you like and donrsquot like in occasional on-line surveysmdashso you can help shape digital television in the future
To register as a member of the DBA Early Adopter Club pleaseenter your contact details on the registration web page at httpwwwdbaorgauregisterasp You will then receive a con-firmation of your membership and a sign-on password
We look forwarding to welcoming you to the DBA Early AdopterClub
Tim OrsquoKeefeDigital Broadcasting Australia
v
Contents
Contents v
1 Introduction 1
11 Introduction 1
12 Controlling the digital receiver 3
121 The front panel 3
122 The remote control 4
2 Installation 7
21 Packing contents 7
22 Safety precautions 7
23 Rear panel connections 10
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
3 Preference Settings 14
31 Language settings 14
32 Video and audio settings 15
321 Televsion standard 16
322 Color model 16
vi CONTENTS
323 Video cassette recorder 17
324 Television aspect ratio 18
325 Sound mode 19
326 RF output 19
33 Local time setting 20
34 Parental control 22
35 Adjusting on-screen display 24
36 Enabling the time shift function 24
4 Service Search 25
41 Searching broadcasting services 25
42 Resetting to factory settings 26
5 Daily Usage 27
51 Browsing services 27
52 Viewing program information 29
53 Viewing an electronic program guide 30
54 Selecting an audio track 31
55 Selecting a subtitle track 32
56 Viewing a teletext 32
57 Selecting a multifeed service 32
58 Watching by time shift 33
59 Watching by picture in picture 34
6 Listing Services 35
7 Recording and Playing Back 38
71 Recording a program 39
711 Immediate recording by the remote control 39
vii
712 Making a timer recording 40
713 Recording by electronic program guide 42
714 Recording when using time shift 43
72 File list 44
73 Playing back a recording 46
731 To play back in slow motion 47
732 To play back in fast motion 47
733 To play back recordings in sequence 48
734 To make a bookmark 48
735 To play back a recording repeatedly 49
74 Editing a recording 50
741 To erase a block from a recording 50
742 To store a block from a recording 50
75 Playing a MP3 51
76 Formatting hard disk 52
8 Topfield Application Program 53
9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer 55
91 Updating the firmware 56
92 Transferring the receiver data 58
93 Transferring recording files 59
Index 60
1
Chapter 1
Introduction
11 Introduction
The TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece digital receiver is fully compli-ant with the international Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB)standard and can receive digital broadcastings To operate ityou need an antenna which must be installed appropriately
Unlike analog broadcastings digital broadcastings are not allassigned to their own frequencies 1instead several televisionand radio broadcastings are transmitted through a single trans-ponder on a single wideband carrier
NOTE A transponder is in fact a wireless device which re-ceives and transmits radio signals at a prescribed fre-quency range You may regard a transponder as achannel One channel has one broadcasting in ana-log broadcast on the other hand one transponder hasseveral broadcastings in digital broadcast So the wordservice is used instead of channel to indicate a broad-casting in this document
To help you with the choice and setting for broadcasting ser-
2 Introduction
vices a selection of television and radio services have alreadybeen programmed for you So all broadcasting services thathave gone on air are available to you You can find the latesttransponder information from various broadcasters on tele-text
The TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece digital receiver has features asfollows
bull The digtial receiver is able to memorize up to 2000 tele-vision and radio services
bull Electronic Program Guide (EPG) provides an overviewof program schedules for next few hours
bull You can edit the service list and make your own favoriteservice list
bull You can view the information of a current television orradio program
bull You can update the firmware of the digital receiver tothe latest which will be provided by Topfield
bull The digital receiver features a digital video recorder withtwo tuners with which you can record your choice ofbroadcasting services independently of ones you are cur-rently watching
bull The large storage capacity of the built-in hard disk al-lows you to record up to 40 hours of materialmdashin caseof 80 gigabytesmdashin excellent picture and sound quality
bull Time shift function is a special technical feature Youcan pause the program you are watching and resume itagain at a later time You can quickly find whatever partof the current program by reverse or forward search
bull During a recording in progress you can select a differentprogram from the archive and watch it
12 Controlling the digital receiver 3
12 Controlling the digital receiver
You can control the digital receiver with the remote controland the front panel buttons
NOTE When the digital receiver is off but plugged to a walloutlet we say that it is in standby mode on the otherhand when it is on it is in operation mode You shouldkeep the digital receiver plugged to a wall outlet so asit can run timer events
121 The front panel
STANDBY button toggles the digital receiver between oper-ation mode and standby mode
CHANNELac buttons switch to another service and movethe highlight bar vertically in a menu
VOLUMEbd buttons change the volume and select anoption in a menu
Status display displays a current time in standby mode anddisplays a current status of the digital receiver in op-eration mode
4 Introduction
122 The remote control
1⃝ button toggles the digital re-ceiver between operation modeand standby mode
2⃝ button mutes the television oraudio appliance
3⃝ currenpound iexclcentUHF button displays the RF set-ting menu For more descrip-tions refer to sect 326
4⃝ button toggles operation be-tween the digital receiver andyour video recorder For moredescriptions refer to sect 323
5⃝ button sets a sleep timer Thedigital receiver is turned off tostandby mode when a specifiedduration is elapsed
6⃝ Numeral buttons are used tospecify a service to watch or a pa-rameter such as timer
7⃝ button makes a return to theprevious service
8⃝ button displays the informa-tion about the program on the air
9⃝currenpound iexclcentGUIDE button displays an electronic program guide
10⃝ button toggles between TV mode and radio mode
11⃝ currenpound iexclcentMENU button displays the menu or escapes to a higherlevel menu out of a submenu
12⃝ button is used to select an audio track a sound mode
12 Controlling the digital receiver 5
or a multifeed if available
13⃝ currenpound iexclcentV+ currenpound iexclcentVminus buttons change the volume and select an op-
tion in a menu
14⃝ currenpound iexclcentP+ currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons switch to another service and move
the highlight bar vertically in a menu
15⃝currenpound iexclcentOK button displays the service list and selects an entryin a menu or list
16⃝ currenpound iexclcentFAV button displays the favorite service list
17⃝ button is used to select a subtitle track if available
18⃝ currenpound iexclcentEXIT button escapes from any menu
19⃝ button displays teletext if available
20⃝ button starts backward playback or backward scan
21⃝ button starts a playback
22⃝ button starts forward scan
23⃝ button starts slow playback
24⃝ button stops a playback
25⃝ button starts a recording
26⃝ button captures a picture from a live show Thisbutton also pauses a playback
27⃝ button moves the position of subpicture counter-colckwise
28⃝ button moves the position of subpicture clockwise
29⃝currenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges a main-picture with a subpic-ture
30⃝ button displays resizes and hides a subpicture
31⃝ button makes a a bookmark during a playback or atime shift
6 Introduction
32⃝ button plays back from a next bookmark position
33⃝ button is used to edit a recording file
34⃝ button displays recording file list MP3 file list orapplication file list For more descriptions refer to sect 74
35⃝ button displays a service list for subpicture or spec-ifies a block for a repeated playback
36⃝currenpound iexclcentNP button is unavailable for this model
If you do not have wide-screen television but normal screentelevision pressing the
currenpound iexclcent0 button changes depending on broad-casting conditions the display format as follows
43 Center Extract rarr 43 Letter Box rarr 169 Full screen
and buttons have additional differentfunctions per menu besides their own function Their func-tions will be guided in the help window on a menu screen
If the remote control does not work please check the remotecontrol mode There are 4 modes with this remote control Youcan alter the mode by pressing two buttons simultaneously asfollows
bull Mode 1 +currenpound iexclcent1
bull Mode 2 +currenpound iexclcent2
bull Mode 3 +currenpound iexclcent3
bull Mode 4 +currenpound iexclcent4
The mode 1 will work at default
7
Chapter 2
Installation
21 Packing contents
Before going any further check that you have received the fol-lowing items with your digital receiver
bull Remote control unitbull Two batteries for the remote control (AAA 15 V)bull One loop cable to link the first tuner with the second
tunerbull One SCART-to-component cable to link the digital re-
ceiver to your television setbull One RCA cable to link the digital receiver to your tele-
vision setbull A copy of this user guide
22 Safety precautions
Please read and keep the following safety precautions care-fully for your safety
bull The power must be 90 to 250 volt Check it before con-
8 Installation
necting the digital receiver to the wall outlet For thepower cunsumption of the digital receiver refer to Ta-ble 21
bull The wall outlet shall be installed near the equipment andshall be easily accessible
bull The digital receiver is designed to receive record andplay back video and audio signals Any other use is ex-pressly prohibited
bull When setting up the digital receiver make sure it is in ahorizontal position
bull Do not expose the digital receiver to any moisture Thedigital receiver is designed for use in dry rooms If youdo use it outdoors ensure that it is protected from mois-ture such as rain or splashing water Do not place anyvessels such as vases on the digital receiver These maybe knocked over and spill fluid on the electrical compo-nents thus bring about a risk
bull Use only dry cloth when cleaning the digital receiver
bull Do not place the digital receiver close to heating units orin direct sunlight as this will impair cooling Place thedigital receiver on a hard level surface Do not lay anyobjects such as magazines on the digital receiver Whenplaced in a cabinet make sure there is a minimum spaceof 10 cm around it For the physical specification of thedigital receiver refer to Table 22
bull Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinchedparticularly at plugs receptacles and the point wherethey exit from the digital receiver
bull Only use accessories specified by the manufacturer
bull Thunderstroms are a danger to all of electrical devicesEven if the digital receiver is switched off it can be dam-aged by a lightning strike to the power line or the an-
22 Safety precautions 9
tenna cable Always disconnect the power plug and theantenna cable
bull Never open the digital receiver casing under any cir-cumstances Warranty claims are excluded for the dam-age resulting from improper handling
bull Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servic-ing is required when the digital receiver has been dam-aged in any way such as power-supply cord or plug isdamaged liquid has been spilt or objects have fallen intothe digital receiver the digital receiver has been exposedto rain or moisture does not operate normally or hasbeen dropped
Table 21 Power specification
Input voltage 90 to 250 V AC 5060 HzPower consumption Running Max 28 W
Standby 10 W
Table 22 Physical specification
Size 430 times 60 times 265 mmWeight 43 kgOperating temperature 0 to 45 degCStorage humidity 5 to 95 RH
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
iv
digital television developments
You can also provide vital feedback on the features of digitaltelevision you like and donrsquot like in occasional on-line surveysmdashso you can help shape digital television in the future
To register as a member of the DBA Early Adopter Club pleaseenter your contact details on the registration web page at httpwwwdbaorgauregisterasp You will then receive a con-firmation of your membership and a sign-on password
We look forwarding to welcoming you to the DBA Early AdopterClub
Tim OrsquoKeefeDigital Broadcasting Australia
v
Contents
Contents v
1 Introduction 1
11 Introduction 1
12 Controlling the digital receiver 3
121 The front panel 3
122 The remote control 4
2 Installation 7
21 Packing contents 7
22 Safety precautions 7
23 Rear panel connections 10
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
3 Preference Settings 14
31 Language settings 14
32 Video and audio settings 15
321 Televsion standard 16
322 Color model 16
vi CONTENTS
323 Video cassette recorder 17
324 Television aspect ratio 18
325 Sound mode 19
326 RF output 19
33 Local time setting 20
34 Parental control 22
35 Adjusting on-screen display 24
36 Enabling the time shift function 24
4 Service Search 25
41 Searching broadcasting services 25
42 Resetting to factory settings 26
5 Daily Usage 27
51 Browsing services 27
52 Viewing program information 29
53 Viewing an electronic program guide 30
54 Selecting an audio track 31
55 Selecting a subtitle track 32
56 Viewing a teletext 32
57 Selecting a multifeed service 32
58 Watching by time shift 33
59 Watching by picture in picture 34
6 Listing Services 35
7 Recording and Playing Back 38
71 Recording a program 39
711 Immediate recording by the remote control 39
vii
712 Making a timer recording 40
713 Recording by electronic program guide 42
714 Recording when using time shift 43
72 File list 44
73 Playing back a recording 46
731 To play back in slow motion 47
732 To play back in fast motion 47
733 To play back recordings in sequence 48
734 To make a bookmark 48
735 To play back a recording repeatedly 49
74 Editing a recording 50
741 To erase a block from a recording 50
742 To store a block from a recording 50
75 Playing a MP3 51
76 Formatting hard disk 52
8 Topfield Application Program 53
9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer 55
91 Updating the firmware 56
92 Transferring the receiver data 58
93 Transferring recording files 59
Index 60
1
Chapter 1
Introduction
11 Introduction
The TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece digital receiver is fully compli-ant with the international Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB)standard and can receive digital broadcastings To operate ityou need an antenna which must be installed appropriately
Unlike analog broadcastings digital broadcastings are not allassigned to their own frequencies 1instead several televisionand radio broadcastings are transmitted through a single trans-ponder on a single wideband carrier
NOTE A transponder is in fact a wireless device which re-ceives and transmits radio signals at a prescribed fre-quency range You may regard a transponder as achannel One channel has one broadcasting in ana-log broadcast on the other hand one transponder hasseveral broadcastings in digital broadcast So the wordservice is used instead of channel to indicate a broad-casting in this document
To help you with the choice and setting for broadcasting ser-
2 Introduction
vices a selection of television and radio services have alreadybeen programmed for you So all broadcasting services thathave gone on air are available to you You can find the latesttransponder information from various broadcasters on tele-text
The TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece digital receiver has features asfollows
bull The digtial receiver is able to memorize up to 2000 tele-vision and radio services
bull Electronic Program Guide (EPG) provides an overviewof program schedules for next few hours
bull You can edit the service list and make your own favoriteservice list
bull You can view the information of a current television orradio program
bull You can update the firmware of the digital receiver tothe latest which will be provided by Topfield
bull The digital receiver features a digital video recorder withtwo tuners with which you can record your choice ofbroadcasting services independently of ones you are cur-rently watching
bull The large storage capacity of the built-in hard disk al-lows you to record up to 40 hours of materialmdashin caseof 80 gigabytesmdashin excellent picture and sound quality
bull Time shift function is a special technical feature Youcan pause the program you are watching and resume itagain at a later time You can quickly find whatever partof the current program by reverse or forward search
bull During a recording in progress you can select a differentprogram from the archive and watch it
12 Controlling the digital receiver 3
12 Controlling the digital receiver
You can control the digital receiver with the remote controland the front panel buttons
NOTE When the digital receiver is off but plugged to a walloutlet we say that it is in standby mode on the otherhand when it is on it is in operation mode You shouldkeep the digital receiver plugged to a wall outlet so asit can run timer events
121 The front panel
STANDBY button toggles the digital receiver between oper-ation mode and standby mode
CHANNELac buttons switch to another service and movethe highlight bar vertically in a menu
VOLUMEbd buttons change the volume and select anoption in a menu
Status display displays a current time in standby mode anddisplays a current status of the digital receiver in op-eration mode
4 Introduction
122 The remote control
1⃝ button toggles the digital re-ceiver between operation modeand standby mode
2⃝ button mutes the television oraudio appliance
3⃝ currenpound iexclcentUHF button displays the RF set-ting menu For more descrip-tions refer to sect 326
4⃝ button toggles operation be-tween the digital receiver andyour video recorder For moredescriptions refer to sect 323
5⃝ button sets a sleep timer Thedigital receiver is turned off tostandby mode when a specifiedduration is elapsed
6⃝ Numeral buttons are used tospecify a service to watch or a pa-rameter such as timer
7⃝ button makes a return to theprevious service
8⃝ button displays the informa-tion about the program on the air
9⃝currenpound iexclcentGUIDE button displays an electronic program guide
10⃝ button toggles between TV mode and radio mode
11⃝ currenpound iexclcentMENU button displays the menu or escapes to a higherlevel menu out of a submenu
12⃝ button is used to select an audio track a sound mode
12 Controlling the digital receiver 5
or a multifeed if available
13⃝ currenpound iexclcentV+ currenpound iexclcentVminus buttons change the volume and select an op-
tion in a menu
14⃝ currenpound iexclcentP+ currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons switch to another service and move
the highlight bar vertically in a menu
15⃝currenpound iexclcentOK button displays the service list and selects an entryin a menu or list
16⃝ currenpound iexclcentFAV button displays the favorite service list
17⃝ button is used to select a subtitle track if available
18⃝ currenpound iexclcentEXIT button escapes from any menu
19⃝ button displays teletext if available
20⃝ button starts backward playback or backward scan
21⃝ button starts a playback
22⃝ button starts forward scan
23⃝ button starts slow playback
24⃝ button stops a playback
25⃝ button starts a recording
26⃝ button captures a picture from a live show Thisbutton also pauses a playback
27⃝ button moves the position of subpicture counter-colckwise
28⃝ button moves the position of subpicture clockwise
29⃝currenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges a main-picture with a subpic-ture
30⃝ button displays resizes and hides a subpicture
31⃝ button makes a a bookmark during a playback or atime shift
6 Introduction
32⃝ button plays back from a next bookmark position
33⃝ button is used to edit a recording file
34⃝ button displays recording file list MP3 file list orapplication file list For more descriptions refer to sect 74
35⃝ button displays a service list for subpicture or spec-ifies a block for a repeated playback
36⃝currenpound iexclcentNP button is unavailable for this model
If you do not have wide-screen television but normal screentelevision pressing the
currenpound iexclcent0 button changes depending on broad-casting conditions the display format as follows
43 Center Extract rarr 43 Letter Box rarr 169 Full screen
and buttons have additional differentfunctions per menu besides their own function Their func-tions will be guided in the help window on a menu screen
If the remote control does not work please check the remotecontrol mode There are 4 modes with this remote control Youcan alter the mode by pressing two buttons simultaneously asfollows
bull Mode 1 +currenpound iexclcent1
bull Mode 2 +currenpound iexclcent2
bull Mode 3 +currenpound iexclcent3
bull Mode 4 +currenpound iexclcent4
The mode 1 will work at default
7
Chapter 2
Installation
21 Packing contents
Before going any further check that you have received the fol-lowing items with your digital receiver
bull Remote control unitbull Two batteries for the remote control (AAA 15 V)bull One loop cable to link the first tuner with the second
tunerbull One SCART-to-component cable to link the digital re-
ceiver to your television setbull One RCA cable to link the digital receiver to your tele-
vision setbull A copy of this user guide
22 Safety precautions
Please read and keep the following safety precautions care-fully for your safety
bull The power must be 90 to 250 volt Check it before con-
8 Installation
necting the digital receiver to the wall outlet For thepower cunsumption of the digital receiver refer to Ta-ble 21
bull The wall outlet shall be installed near the equipment andshall be easily accessible
bull The digital receiver is designed to receive record andplay back video and audio signals Any other use is ex-pressly prohibited
bull When setting up the digital receiver make sure it is in ahorizontal position
bull Do not expose the digital receiver to any moisture Thedigital receiver is designed for use in dry rooms If youdo use it outdoors ensure that it is protected from mois-ture such as rain or splashing water Do not place anyvessels such as vases on the digital receiver These maybe knocked over and spill fluid on the electrical compo-nents thus bring about a risk
bull Use only dry cloth when cleaning the digital receiver
bull Do not place the digital receiver close to heating units orin direct sunlight as this will impair cooling Place thedigital receiver on a hard level surface Do not lay anyobjects such as magazines on the digital receiver Whenplaced in a cabinet make sure there is a minimum spaceof 10 cm around it For the physical specification of thedigital receiver refer to Table 22
bull Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinchedparticularly at plugs receptacles and the point wherethey exit from the digital receiver
bull Only use accessories specified by the manufacturer
bull Thunderstroms are a danger to all of electrical devicesEven if the digital receiver is switched off it can be dam-aged by a lightning strike to the power line or the an-
22 Safety precautions 9
tenna cable Always disconnect the power plug and theantenna cable
bull Never open the digital receiver casing under any cir-cumstances Warranty claims are excluded for the dam-age resulting from improper handling
bull Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servic-ing is required when the digital receiver has been dam-aged in any way such as power-supply cord or plug isdamaged liquid has been spilt or objects have fallen intothe digital receiver the digital receiver has been exposedto rain or moisture does not operate normally or hasbeen dropped
Table 21 Power specification
Input voltage 90 to 250 V AC 5060 HzPower consumption Running Max 28 W
Standby 10 W
Table 22 Physical specification
Size 430 times 60 times 265 mmWeight 43 kgOperating temperature 0 to 45 degCStorage humidity 5 to 95 RH
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
v
Contents
Contents v
1 Introduction 1
11 Introduction 1
12 Controlling the digital receiver 3
121 The front panel 3
122 The remote control 4
2 Installation 7
21 Packing contents 7
22 Safety precautions 7
23 Rear panel connections 10
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
3 Preference Settings 14
31 Language settings 14
32 Video and audio settings 15
321 Televsion standard 16
322 Color model 16
vi CONTENTS
323 Video cassette recorder 17
324 Television aspect ratio 18
325 Sound mode 19
326 RF output 19
33 Local time setting 20
34 Parental control 22
35 Adjusting on-screen display 24
36 Enabling the time shift function 24
4 Service Search 25
41 Searching broadcasting services 25
42 Resetting to factory settings 26
5 Daily Usage 27
51 Browsing services 27
52 Viewing program information 29
53 Viewing an electronic program guide 30
54 Selecting an audio track 31
55 Selecting a subtitle track 32
56 Viewing a teletext 32
57 Selecting a multifeed service 32
58 Watching by time shift 33
59 Watching by picture in picture 34
6 Listing Services 35
7 Recording and Playing Back 38
71 Recording a program 39
711 Immediate recording by the remote control 39
vii
712 Making a timer recording 40
713 Recording by electronic program guide 42
714 Recording when using time shift 43
72 File list 44
73 Playing back a recording 46
731 To play back in slow motion 47
732 To play back in fast motion 47
733 To play back recordings in sequence 48
734 To make a bookmark 48
735 To play back a recording repeatedly 49
74 Editing a recording 50
741 To erase a block from a recording 50
742 To store a block from a recording 50
75 Playing a MP3 51
76 Formatting hard disk 52
8 Topfield Application Program 53
9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer 55
91 Updating the firmware 56
92 Transferring the receiver data 58
93 Transferring recording files 59
Index 60
1
Chapter 1
Introduction
11 Introduction
The TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece digital receiver is fully compli-ant with the international Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB)standard and can receive digital broadcastings To operate ityou need an antenna which must be installed appropriately
Unlike analog broadcastings digital broadcastings are not allassigned to their own frequencies 1instead several televisionand radio broadcastings are transmitted through a single trans-ponder on a single wideband carrier
NOTE A transponder is in fact a wireless device which re-ceives and transmits radio signals at a prescribed fre-quency range You may regard a transponder as achannel One channel has one broadcasting in ana-log broadcast on the other hand one transponder hasseveral broadcastings in digital broadcast So the wordservice is used instead of channel to indicate a broad-casting in this document
To help you with the choice and setting for broadcasting ser-
2 Introduction
vices a selection of television and radio services have alreadybeen programmed for you So all broadcasting services thathave gone on air are available to you You can find the latesttransponder information from various broadcasters on tele-text
The TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece digital receiver has features asfollows
bull The digtial receiver is able to memorize up to 2000 tele-vision and radio services
bull Electronic Program Guide (EPG) provides an overviewof program schedules for next few hours
bull You can edit the service list and make your own favoriteservice list
bull You can view the information of a current television orradio program
bull You can update the firmware of the digital receiver tothe latest which will be provided by Topfield
bull The digital receiver features a digital video recorder withtwo tuners with which you can record your choice ofbroadcasting services independently of ones you are cur-rently watching
bull The large storage capacity of the built-in hard disk al-lows you to record up to 40 hours of materialmdashin caseof 80 gigabytesmdashin excellent picture and sound quality
bull Time shift function is a special technical feature Youcan pause the program you are watching and resume itagain at a later time You can quickly find whatever partof the current program by reverse or forward search
bull During a recording in progress you can select a differentprogram from the archive and watch it
12 Controlling the digital receiver 3
12 Controlling the digital receiver
You can control the digital receiver with the remote controland the front panel buttons
NOTE When the digital receiver is off but plugged to a walloutlet we say that it is in standby mode on the otherhand when it is on it is in operation mode You shouldkeep the digital receiver plugged to a wall outlet so asit can run timer events
121 The front panel
STANDBY button toggles the digital receiver between oper-ation mode and standby mode
CHANNELac buttons switch to another service and movethe highlight bar vertically in a menu
VOLUMEbd buttons change the volume and select anoption in a menu
Status display displays a current time in standby mode anddisplays a current status of the digital receiver in op-eration mode
4 Introduction
122 The remote control
1⃝ button toggles the digital re-ceiver between operation modeand standby mode
2⃝ button mutes the television oraudio appliance
3⃝ currenpound iexclcentUHF button displays the RF set-ting menu For more descrip-tions refer to sect 326
4⃝ button toggles operation be-tween the digital receiver andyour video recorder For moredescriptions refer to sect 323
5⃝ button sets a sleep timer Thedigital receiver is turned off tostandby mode when a specifiedduration is elapsed
6⃝ Numeral buttons are used tospecify a service to watch or a pa-rameter such as timer
7⃝ button makes a return to theprevious service
8⃝ button displays the informa-tion about the program on the air
9⃝currenpound iexclcentGUIDE button displays an electronic program guide
10⃝ button toggles between TV mode and radio mode
11⃝ currenpound iexclcentMENU button displays the menu or escapes to a higherlevel menu out of a submenu
12⃝ button is used to select an audio track a sound mode
12 Controlling the digital receiver 5
or a multifeed if available
13⃝ currenpound iexclcentV+ currenpound iexclcentVminus buttons change the volume and select an op-
tion in a menu
14⃝ currenpound iexclcentP+ currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons switch to another service and move
the highlight bar vertically in a menu
15⃝currenpound iexclcentOK button displays the service list and selects an entryin a menu or list
16⃝ currenpound iexclcentFAV button displays the favorite service list
17⃝ button is used to select a subtitle track if available
18⃝ currenpound iexclcentEXIT button escapes from any menu
19⃝ button displays teletext if available
20⃝ button starts backward playback or backward scan
21⃝ button starts a playback
22⃝ button starts forward scan
23⃝ button starts slow playback
24⃝ button stops a playback
25⃝ button starts a recording
26⃝ button captures a picture from a live show Thisbutton also pauses a playback
27⃝ button moves the position of subpicture counter-colckwise
28⃝ button moves the position of subpicture clockwise
29⃝currenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges a main-picture with a subpic-ture
30⃝ button displays resizes and hides a subpicture
31⃝ button makes a a bookmark during a playback or atime shift
6 Introduction
32⃝ button plays back from a next bookmark position
33⃝ button is used to edit a recording file
34⃝ button displays recording file list MP3 file list orapplication file list For more descriptions refer to sect 74
35⃝ button displays a service list for subpicture or spec-ifies a block for a repeated playback
36⃝currenpound iexclcentNP button is unavailable for this model
If you do not have wide-screen television but normal screentelevision pressing the
currenpound iexclcent0 button changes depending on broad-casting conditions the display format as follows
43 Center Extract rarr 43 Letter Box rarr 169 Full screen
and buttons have additional differentfunctions per menu besides their own function Their func-tions will be guided in the help window on a menu screen
If the remote control does not work please check the remotecontrol mode There are 4 modes with this remote control Youcan alter the mode by pressing two buttons simultaneously asfollows
bull Mode 1 +currenpound iexclcent1
bull Mode 2 +currenpound iexclcent2
bull Mode 3 +currenpound iexclcent3
bull Mode 4 +currenpound iexclcent4
The mode 1 will work at default
7
Chapter 2
Installation
21 Packing contents
Before going any further check that you have received the fol-lowing items with your digital receiver
bull Remote control unitbull Two batteries for the remote control (AAA 15 V)bull One loop cable to link the first tuner with the second
tunerbull One SCART-to-component cable to link the digital re-
ceiver to your television setbull One RCA cable to link the digital receiver to your tele-
vision setbull A copy of this user guide
22 Safety precautions
Please read and keep the following safety precautions care-fully for your safety
bull The power must be 90 to 250 volt Check it before con-
8 Installation
necting the digital receiver to the wall outlet For thepower cunsumption of the digital receiver refer to Ta-ble 21
bull The wall outlet shall be installed near the equipment andshall be easily accessible
bull The digital receiver is designed to receive record andplay back video and audio signals Any other use is ex-pressly prohibited
bull When setting up the digital receiver make sure it is in ahorizontal position
bull Do not expose the digital receiver to any moisture Thedigital receiver is designed for use in dry rooms If youdo use it outdoors ensure that it is protected from mois-ture such as rain or splashing water Do not place anyvessels such as vases on the digital receiver These maybe knocked over and spill fluid on the electrical compo-nents thus bring about a risk
bull Use only dry cloth when cleaning the digital receiver
bull Do not place the digital receiver close to heating units orin direct sunlight as this will impair cooling Place thedigital receiver on a hard level surface Do not lay anyobjects such as magazines on the digital receiver Whenplaced in a cabinet make sure there is a minimum spaceof 10 cm around it For the physical specification of thedigital receiver refer to Table 22
bull Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinchedparticularly at plugs receptacles and the point wherethey exit from the digital receiver
bull Only use accessories specified by the manufacturer
bull Thunderstroms are a danger to all of electrical devicesEven if the digital receiver is switched off it can be dam-aged by a lightning strike to the power line or the an-
22 Safety precautions 9
tenna cable Always disconnect the power plug and theantenna cable
bull Never open the digital receiver casing under any cir-cumstances Warranty claims are excluded for the dam-age resulting from improper handling
bull Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servic-ing is required when the digital receiver has been dam-aged in any way such as power-supply cord or plug isdamaged liquid has been spilt or objects have fallen intothe digital receiver the digital receiver has been exposedto rain or moisture does not operate normally or hasbeen dropped
Table 21 Power specification
Input voltage 90 to 250 V AC 5060 HzPower consumption Running Max 28 W
Standby 10 W
Table 22 Physical specification
Size 430 times 60 times 265 mmWeight 43 kgOperating temperature 0 to 45 degCStorage humidity 5 to 95 RH
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
vi CONTENTS
323 Video cassette recorder 17
324 Television aspect ratio 18
325 Sound mode 19
326 RF output 19
33 Local time setting 20
34 Parental control 22
35 Adjusting on-screen display 24
36 Enabling the time shift function 24
4 Service Search 25
41 Searching broadcasting services 25
42 Resetting to factory settings 26
5 Daily Usage 27
51 Browsing services 27
52 Viewing program information 29
53 Viewing an electronic program guide 30
54 Selecting an audio track 31
55 Selecting a subtitle track 32
56 Viewing a teletext 32
57 Selecting a multifeed service 32
58 Watching by time shift 33
59 Watching by picture in picture 34
6 Listing Services 35
7 Recording and Playing Back 38
71 Recording a program 39
711 Immediate recording by the remote control 39
vii
712 Making a timer recording 40
713 Recording by electronic program guide 42
714 Recording when using time shift 43
72 File list 44
73 Playing back a recording 46
731 To play back in slow motion 47
732 To play back in fast motion 47
733 To play back recordings in sequence 48
734 To make a bookmark 48
735 To play back a recording repeatedly 49
74 Editing a recording 50
741 To erase a block from a recording 50
742 To store a block from a recording 50
75 Playing a MP3 51
76 Formatting hard disk 52
8 Topfield Application Program 53
9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer 55
91 Updating the firmware 56
92 Transferring the receiver data 58
93 Transferring recording files 59
Index 60
1
Chapter 1
Introduction
11 Introduction
The TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece digital receiver is fully compli-ant with the international Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB)standard and can receive digital broadcastings To operate ityou need an antenna which must be installed appropriately
Unlike analog broadcastings digital broadcastings are not allassigned to their own frequencies 1instead several televisionand radio broadcastings are transmitted through a single trans-ponder on a single wideband carrier
NOTE A transponder is in fact a wireless device which re-ceives and transmits radio signals at a prescribed fre-quency range You may regard a transponder as achannel One channel has one broadcasting in ana-log broadcast on the other hand one transponder hasseveral broadcastings in digital broadcast So the wordservice is used instead of channel to indicate a broad-casting in this document
To help you with the choice and setting for broadcasting ser-
2 Introduction
vices a selection of television and radio services have alreadybeen programmed for you So all broadcasting services thathave gone on air are available to you You can find the latesttransponder information from various broadcasters on tele-text
The TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece digital receiver has features asfollows
bull The digtial receiver is able to memorize up to 2000 tele-vision and radio services
bull Electronic Program Guide (EPG) provides an overviewof program schedules for next few hours
bull You can edit the service list and make your own favoriteservice list
bull You can view the information of a current television orradio program
bull You can update the firmware of the digital receiver tothe latest which will be provided by Topfield
bull The digital receiver features a digital video recorder withtwo tuners with which you can record your choice ofbroadcasting services independently of ones you are cur-rently watching
bull The large storage capacity of the built-in hard disk al-lows you to record up to 40 hours of materialmdashin caseof 80 gigabytesmdashin excellent picture and sound quality
bull Time shift function is a special technical feature Youcan pause the program you are watching and resume itagain at a later time You can quickly find whatever partof the current program by reverse or forward search
bull During a recording in progress you can select a differentprogram from the archive and watch it
12 Controlling the digital receiver 3
12 Controlling the digital receiver
You can control the digital receiver with the remote controland the front panel buttons
NOTE When the digital receiver is off but plugged to a walloutlet we say that it is in standby mode on the otherhand when it is on it is in operation mode You shouldkeep the digital receiver plugged to a wall outlet so asit can run timer events
121 The front panel
STANDBY button toggles the digital receiver between oper-ation mode and standby mode
CHANNELac buttons switch to another service and movethe highlight bar vertically in a menu
VOLUMEbd buttons change the volume and select anoption in a menu
Status display displays a current time in standby mode anddisplays a current status of the digital receiver in op-eration mode
4 Introduction
122 The remote control
1⃝ button toggles the digital re-ceiver between operation modeand standby mode
2⃝ button mutes the television oraudio appliance
3⃝ currenpound iexclcentUHF button displays the RF set-ting menu For more descrip-tions refer to sect 326
4⃝ button toggles operation be-tween the digital receiver andyour video recorder For moredescriptions refer to sect 323
5⃝ button sets a sleep timer Thedigital receiver is turned off tostandby mode when a specifiedduration is elapsed
6⃝ Numeral buttons are used tospecify a service to watch or a pa-rameter such as timer
7⃝ button makes a return to theprevious service
8⃝ button displays the informa-tion about the program on the air
9⃝currenpound iexclcentGUIDE button displays an electronic program guide
10⃝ button toggles between TV mode and radio mode
11⃝ currenpound iexclcentMENU button displays the menu or escapes to a higherlevel menu out of a submenu
12⃝ button is used to select an audio track a sound mode
12 Controlling the digital receiver 5
or a multifeed if available
13⃝ currenpound iexclcentV+ currenpound iexclcentVminus buttons change the volume and select an op-
tion in a menu
14⃝ currenpound iexclcentP+ currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons switch to another service and move
the highlight bar vertically in a menu
15⃝currenpound iexclcentOK button displays the service list and selects an entryin a menu or list
16⃝ currenpound iexclcentFAV button displays the favorite service list
17⃝ button is used to select a subtitle track if available
18⃝ currenpound iexclcentEXIT button escapes from any menu
19⃝ button displays teletext if available
20⃝ button starts backward playback or backward scan
21⃝ button starts a playback
22⃝ button starts forward scan
23⃝ button starts slow playback
24⃝ button stops a playback
25⃝ button starts a recording
26⃝ button captures a picture from a live show Thisbutton also pauses a playback
27⃝ button moves the position of subpicture counter-colckwise
28⃝ button moves the position of subpicture clockwise
29⃝currenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges a main-picture with a subpic-ture
30⃝ button displays resizes and hides a subpicture
31⃝ button makes a a bookmark during a playback or atime shift
6 Introduction
32⃝ button plays back from a next bookmark position
33⃝ button is used to edit a recording file
34⃝ button displays recording file list MP3 file list orapplication file list For more descriptions refer to sect 74
35⃝ button displays a service list for subpicture or spec-ifies a block for a repeated playback
36⃝currenpound iexclcentNP button is unavailable for this model
If you do not have wide-screen television but normal screentelevision pressing the
currenpound iexclcent0 button changes depending on broad-casting conditions the display format as follows
43 Center Extract rarr 43 Letter Box rarr 169 Full screen
and buttons have additional differentfunctions per menu besides their own function Their func-tions will be guided in the help window on a menu screen
If the remote control does not work please check the remotecontrol mode There are 4 modes with this remote control Youcan alter the mode by pressing two buttons simultaneously asfollows
bull Mode 1 +currenpound iexclcent1
bull Mode 2 +currenpound iexclcent2
bull Mode 3 +currenpound iexclcent3
bull Mode 4 +currenpound iexclcent4
The mode 1 will work at default
7
Chapter 2
Installation
21 Packing contents
Before going any further check that you have received the fol-lowing items with your digital receiver
bull Remote control unitbull Two batteries for the remote control (AAA 15 V)bull One loop cable to link the first tuner with the second
tunerbull One SCART-to-component cable to link the digital re-
ceiver to your television setbull One RCA cable to link the digital receiver to your tele-
vision setbull A copy of this user guide
22 Safety precautions
Please read and keep the following safety precautions care-fully for your safety
bull The power must be 90 to 250 volt Check it before con-
8 Installation
necting the digital receiver to the wall outlet For thepower cunsumption of the digital receiver refer to Ta-ble 21
bull The wall outlet shall be installed near the equipment andshall be easily accessible
bull The digital receiver is designed to receive record andplay back video and audio signals Any other use is ex-pressly prohibited
bull When setting up the digital receiver make sure it is in ahorizontal position
bull Do not expose the digital receiver to any moisture Thedigital receiver is designed for use in dry rooms If youdo use it outdoors ensure that it is protected from mois-ture such as rain or splashing water Do not place anyvessels such as vases on the digital receiver These maybe knocked over and spill fluid on the electrical compo-nents thus bring about a risk
bull Use only dry cloth when cleaning the digital receiver
bull Do not place the digital receiver close to heating units orin direct sunlight as this will impair cooling Place thedigital receiver on a hard level surface Do not lay anyobjects such as magazines on the digital receiver Whenplaced in a cabinet make sure there is a minimum spaceof 10 cm around it For the physical specification of thedigital receiver refer to Table 22
bull Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinchedparticularly at plugs receptacles and the point wherethey exit from the digital receiver
bull Only use accessories specified by the manufacturer
bull Thunderstroms are a danger to all of electrical devicesEven if the digital receiver is switched off it can be dam-aged by a lightning strike to the power line or the an-
22 Safety precautions 9
tenna cable Always disconnect the power plug and theantenna cable
bull Never open the digital receiver casing under any cir-cumstances Warranty claims are excluded for the dam-age resulting from improper handling
bull Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servic-ing is required when the digital receiver has been dam-aged in any way such as power-supply cord or plug isdamaged liquid has been spilt or objects have fallen intothe digital receiver the digital receiver has been exposedto rain or moisture does not operate normally or hasbeen dropped
Table 21 Power specification
Input voltage 90 to 250 V AC 5060 HzPower consumption Running Max 28 W
Standby 10 W
Table 22 Physical specification
Size 430 times 60 times 265 mmWeight 43 kgOperating temperature 0 to 45 degCStorage humidity 5 to 95 RH
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
vii
712 Making a timer recording 40
713 Recording by electronic program guide 42
714 Recording when using time shift 43
72 File list 44
73 Playing back a recording 46
731 To play back in slow motion 47
732 To play back in fast motion 47
733 To play back recordings in sequence 48
734 To make a bookmark 48
735 To play back a recording repeatedly 49
74 Editing a recording 50
741 To erase a block from a recording 50
742 To store a block from a recording 50
75 Playing a MP3 51
76 Formatting hard disk 52
8 Topfield Application Program 53
9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer 55
91 Updating the firmware 56
92 Transferring the receiver data 58
93 Transferring recording files 59
Index 60
1
Chapter 1
Introduction
11 Introduction
The TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece digital receiver is fully compli-ant with the international Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB)standard and can receive digital broadcastings To operate ityou need an antenna which must be installed appropriately
Unlike analog broadcastings digital broadcastings are not allassigned to their own frequencies 1instead several televisionand radio broadcastings are transmitted through a single trans-ponder on a single wideband carrier
NOTE A transponder is in fact a wireless device which re-ceives and transmits radio signals at a prescribed fre-quency range You may regard a transponder as achannel One channel has one broadcasting in ana-log broadcast on the other hand one transponder hasseveral broadcastings in digital broadcast So the wordservice is used instead of channel to indicate a broad-casting in this document
To help you with the choice and setting for broadcasting ser-
2 Introduction
vices a selection of television and radio services have alreadybeen programmed for you So all broadcasting services thathave gone on air are available to you You can find the latesttransponder information from various broadcasters on tele-text
The TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece digital receiver has features asfollows
bull The digtial receiver is able to memorize up to 2000 tele-vision and radio services
bull Electronic Program Guide (EPG) provides an overviewof program schedules for next few hours
bull You can edit the service list and make your own favoriteservice list
bull You can view the information of a current television orradio program
bull You can update the firmware of the digital receiver tothe latest which will be provided by Topfield
bull The digital receiver features a digital video recorder withtwo tuners with which you can record your choice ofbroadcasting services independently of ones you are cur-rently watching
bull The large storage capacity of the built-in hard disk al-lows you to record up to 40 hours of materialmdashin caseof 80 gigabytesmdashin excellent picture and sound quality
bull Time shift function is a special technical feature Youcan pause the program you are watching and resume itagain at a later time You can quickly find whatever partof the current program by reverse or forward search
bull During a recording in progress you can select a differentprogram from the archive and watch it
12 Controlling the digital receiver 3
12 Controlling the digital receiver
You can control the digital receiver with the remote controland the front panel buttons
NOTE When the digital receiver is off but plugged to a walloutlet we say that it is in standby mode on the otherhand when it is on it is in operation mode You shouldkeep the digital receiver plugged to a wall outlet so asit can run timer events
121 The front panel
STANDBY button toggles the digital receiver between oper-ation mode and standby mode
CHANNELac buttons switch to another service and movethe highlight bar vertically in a menu
VOLUMEbd buttons change the volume and select anoption in a menu
Status display displays a current time in standby mode anddisplays a current status of the digital receiver in op-eration mode
4 Introduction
122 The remote control
1⃝ button toggles the digital re-ceiver between operation modeand standby mode
2⃝ button mutes the television oraudio appliance
3⃝ currenpound iexclcentUHF button displays the RF set-ting menu For more descrip-tions refer to sect 326
4⃝ button toggles operation be-tween the digital receiver andyour video recorder For moredescriptions refer to sect 323
5⃝ button sets a sleep timer Thedigital receiver is turned off tostandby mode when a specifiedduration is elapsed
6⃝ Numeral buttons are used tospecify a service to watch or a pa-rameter such as timer
7⃝ button makes a return to theprevious service
8⃝ button displays the informa-tion about the program on the air
9⃝currenpound iexclcentGUIDE button displays an electronic program guide
10⃝ button toggles between TV mode and radio mode
11⃝ currenpound iexclcentMENU button displays the menu or escapes to a higherlevel menu out of a submenu
12⃝ button is used to select an audio track a sound mode
12 Controlling the digital receiver 5
or a multifeed if available
13⃝ currenpound iexclcentV+ currenpound iexclcentVminus buttons change the volume and select an op-
tion in a menu
14⃝ currenpound iexclcentP+ currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons switch to another service and move
the highlight bar vertically in a menu
15⃝currenpound iexclcentOK button displays the service list and selects an entryin a menu or list
16⃝ currenpound iexclcentFAV button displays the favorite service list
17⃝ button is used to select a subtitle track if available
18⃝ currenpound iexclcentEXIT button escapes from any menu
19⃝ button displays teletext if available
20⃝ button starts backward playback or backward scan
21⃝ button starts a playback
22⃝ button starts forward scan
23⃝ button starts slow playback
24⃝ button stops a playback
25⃝ button starts a recording
26⃝ button captures a picture from a live show Thisbutton also pauses a playback
27⃝ button moves the position of subpicture counter-colckwise
28⃝ button moves the position of subpicture clockwise
29⃝currenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges a main-picture with a subpic-ture
30⃝ button displays resizes and hides a subpicture
31⃝ button makes a a bookmark during a playback or atime shift
6 Introduction
32⃝ button plays back from a next bookmark position
33⃝ button is used to edit a recording file
34⃝ button displays recording file list MP3 file list orapplication file list For more descriptions refer to sect 74
35⃝ button displays a service list for subpicture or spec-ifies a block for a repeated playback
36⃝currenpound iexclcentNP button is unavailable for this model
If you do not have wide-screen television but normal screentelevision pressing the
currenpound iexclcent0 button changes depending on broad-casting conditions the display format as follows
43 Center Extract rarr 43 Letter Box rarr 169 Full screen
and buttons have additional differentfunctions per menu besides their own function Their func-tions will be guided in the help window on a menu screen
If the remote control does not work please check the remotecontrol mode There are 4 modes with this remote control Youcan alter the mode by pressing two buttons simultaneously asfollows
bull Mode 1 +currenpound iexclcent1
bull Mode 2 +currenpound iexclcent2
bull Mode 3 +currenpound iexclcent3
bull Mode 4 +currenpound iexclcent4
The mode 1 will work at default
7
Chapter 2
Installation
21 Packing contents
Before going any further check that you have received the fol-lowing items with your digital receiver
bull Remote control unitbull Two batteries for the remote control (AAA 15 V)bull One loop cable to link the first tuner with the second
tunerbull One SCART-to-component cable to link the digital re-
ceiver to your television setbull One RCA cable to link the digital receiver to your tele-
vision setbull A copy of this user guide
22 Safety precautions
Please read and keep the following safety precautions care-fully for your safety
bull The power must be 90 to 250 volt Check it before con-
8 Installation
necting the digital receiver to the wall outlet For thepower cunsumption of the digital receiver refer to Ta-ble 21
bull The wall outlet shall be installed near the equipment andshall be easily accessible
bull The digital receiver is designed to receive record andplay back video and audio signals Any other use is ex-pressly prohibited
bull When setting up the digital receiver make sure it is in ahorizontal position
bull Do not expose the digital receiver to any moisture Thedigital receiver is designed for use in dry rooms If youdo use it outdoors ensure that it is protected from mois-ture such as rain or splashing water Do not place anyvessels such as vases on the digital receiver These maybe knocked over and spill fluid on the electrical compo-nents thus bring about a risk
bull Use only dry cloth when cleaning the digital receiver
bull Do not place the digital receiver close to heating units orin direct sunlight as this will impair cooling Place thedigital receiver on a hard level surface Do not lay anyobjects such as magazines on the digital receiver Whenplaced in a cabinet make sure there is a minimum spaceof 10 cm around it For the physical specification of thedigital receiver refer to Table 22
bull Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinchedparticularly at plugs receptacles and the point wherethey exit from the digital receiver
bull Only use accessories specified by the manufacturer
bull Thunderstroms are a danger to all of electrical devicesEven if the digital receiver is switched off it can be dam-aged by a lightning strike to the power line or the an-
22 Safety precautions 9
tenna cable Always disconnect the power plug and theantenna cable
bull Never open the digital receiver casing under any cir-cumstances Warranty claims are excluded for the dam-age resulting from improper handling
bull Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servic-ing is required when the digital receiver has been dam-aged in any way such as power-supply cord or plug isdamaged liquid has been spilt or objects have fallen intothe digital receiver the digital receiver has been exposedto rain or moisture does not operate normally or hasbeen dropped
Table 21 Power specification
Input voltage 90 to 250 V AC 5060 HzPower consumption Running Max 28 W
Standby 10 W
Table 22 Physical specification
Size 430 times 60 times 265 mmWeight 43 kgOperating temperature 0 to 45 degCStorage humidity 5 to 95 RH
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
1
Chapter 1
Introduction
11 Introduction
The TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece digital receiver is fully compli-ant with the international Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB)standard and can receive digital broadcastings To operate ityou need an antenna which must be installed appropriately
Unlike analog broadcastings digital broadcastings are not allassigned to their own frequencies 1instead several televisionand radio broadcastings are transmitted through a single trans-ponder on a single wideband carrier
NOTE A transponder is in fact a wireless device which re-ceives and transmits radio signals at a prescribed fre-quency range You may regard a transponder as achannel One channel has one broadcasting in ana-log broadcast on the other hand one transponder hasseveral broadcastings in digital broadcast So the wordservice is used instead of channel to indicate a broad-casting in this document
To help you with the choice and setting for broadcasting ser-
2 Introduction
vices a selection of television and radio services have alreadybeen programmed for you So all broadcasting services thathave gone on air are available to you You can find the latesttransponder information from various broadcasters on tele-text
The TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece digital receiver has features asfollows
bull The digtial receiver is able to memorize up to 2000 tele-vision and radio services
bull Electronic Program Guide (EPG) provides an overviewof program schedules for next few hours
bull You can edit the service list and make your own favoriteservice list
bull You can view the information of a current television orradio program
bull You can update the firmware of the digital receiver tothe latest which will be provided by Topfield
bull The digital receiver features a digital video recorder withtwo tuners with which you can record your choice ofbroadcasting services independently of ones you are cur-rently watching
bull The large storage capacity of the built-in hard disk al-lows you to record up to 40 hours of materialmdashin caseof 80 gigabytesmdashin excellent picture and sound quality
bull Time shift function is a special technical feature Youcan pause the program you are watching and resume itagain at a later time You can quickly find whatever partof the current program by reverse or forward search
bull During a recording in progress you can select a differentprogram from the archive and watch it
12 Controlling the digital receiver 3
12 Controlling the digital receiver
You can control the digital receiver with the remote controland the front panel buttons
NOTE When the digital receiver is off but plugged to a walloutlet we say that it is in standby mode on the otherhand when it is on it is in operation mode You shouldkeep the digital receiver plugged to a wall outlet so asit can run timer events
121 The front panel
STANDBY button toggles the digital receiver between oper-ation mode and standby mode
CHANNELac buttons switch to another service and movethe highlight bar vertically in a menu
VOLUMEbd buttons change the volume and select anoption in a menu
Status display displays a current time in standby mode anddisplays a current status of the digital receiver in op-eration mode
4 Introduction
122 The remote control
1⃝ button toggles the digital re-ceiver between operation modeand standby mode
2⃝ button mutes the television oraudio appliance
3⃝ currenpound iexclcentUHF button displays the RF set-ting menu For more descrip-tions refer to sect 326
4⃝ button toggles operation be-tween the digital receiver andyour video recorder For moredescriptions refer to sect 323
5⃝ button sets a sleep timer Thedigital receiver is turned off tostandby mode when a specifiedduration is elapsed
6⃝ Numeral buttons are used tospecify a service to watch or a pa-rameter such as timer
7⃝ button makes a return to theprevious service
8⃝ button displays the informa-tion about the program on the air
9⃝currenpound iexclcentGUIDE button displays an electronic program guide
10⃝ button toggles between TV mode and radio mode
11⃝ currenpound iexclcentMENU button displays the menu or escapes to a higherlevel menu out of a submenu
12⃝ button is used to select an audio track a sound mode
12 Controlling the digital receiver 5
or a multifeed if available
13⃝ currenpound iexclcentV+ currenpound iexclcentVminus buttons change the volume and select an op-
tion in a menu
14⃝ currenpound iexclcentP+ currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons switch to another service and move
the highlight bar vertically in a menu
15⃝currenpound iexclcentOK button displays the service list and selects an entryin a menu or list
16⃝ currenpound iexclcentFAV button displays the favorite service list
17⃝ button is used to select a subtitle track if available
18⃝ currenpound iexclcentEXIT button escapes from any menu
19⃝ button displays teletext if available
20⃝ button starts backward playback or backward scan
21⃝ button starts a playback
22⃝ button starts forward scan
23⃝ button starts slow playback
24⃝ button stops a playback
25⃝ button starts a recording
26⃝ button captures a picture from a live show Thisbutton also pauses a playback
27⃝ button moves the position of subpicture counter-colckwise
28⃝ button moves the position of subpicture clockwise
29⃝currenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges a main-picture with a subpic-ture
30⃝ button displays resizes and hides a subpicture
31⃝ button makes a a bookmark during a playback or atime shift
6 Introduction
32⃝ button plays back from a next bookmark position
33⃝ button is used to edit a recording file
34⃝ button displays recording file list MP3 file list orapplication file list For more descriptions refer to sect 74
35⃝ button displays a service list for subpicture or spec-ifies a block for a repeated playback
36⃝currenpound iexclcentNP button is unavailable for this model
If you do not have wide-screen television but normal screentelevision pressing the
currenpound iexclcent0 button changes depending on broad-casting conditions the display format as follows
43 Center Extract rarr 43 Letter Box rarr 169 Full screen
and buttons have additional differentfunctions per menu besides their own function Their func-tions will be guided in the help window on a menu screen
If the remote control does not work please check the remotecontrol mode There are 4 modes with this remote control Youcan alter the mode by pressing two buttons simultaneously asfollows
bull Mode 1 +currenpound iexclcent1
bull Mode 2 +currenpound iexclcent2
bull Mode 3 +currenpound iexclcent3
bull Mode 4 +currenpound iexclcent4
The mode 1 will work at default
7
Chapter 2
Installation
21 Packing contents
Before going any further check that you have received the fol-lowing items with your digital receiver
bull Remote control unitbull Two batteries for the remote control (AAA 15 V)bull One loop cable to link the first tuner with the second
tunerbull One SCART-to-component cable to link the digital re-
ceiver to your television setbull One RCA cable to link the digital receiver to your tele-
vision setbull A copy of this user guide
22 Safety precautions
Please read and keep the following safety precautions care-fully for your safety
bull The power must be 90 to 250 volt Check it before con-
8 Installation
necting the digital receiver to the wall outlet For thepower cunsumption of the digital receiver refer to Ta-ble 21
bull The wall outlet shall be installed near the equipment andshall be easily accessible
bull The digital receiver is designed to receive record andplay back video and audio signals Any other use is ex-pressly prohibited
bull When setting up the digital receiver make sure it is in ahorizontal position
bull Do not expose the digital receiver to any moisture Thedigital receiver is designed for use in dry rooms If youdo use it outdoors ensure that it is protected from mois-ture such as rain or splashing water Do not place anyvessels such as vases on the digital receiver These maybe knocked over and spill fluid on the electrical compo-nents thus bring about a risk
bull Use only dry cloth when cleaning the digital receiver
bull Do not place the digital receiver close to heating units orin direct sunlight as this will impair cooling Place thedigital receiver on a hard level surface Do not lay anyobjects such as magazines on the digital receiver Whenplaced in a cabinet make sure there is a minimum spaceof 10 cm around it For the physical specification of thedigital receiver refer to Table 22
bull Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinchedparticularly at plugs receptacles and the point wherethey exit from the digital receiver
bull Only use accessories specified by the manufacturer
bull Thunderstroms are a danger to all of electrical devicesEven if the digital receiver is switched off it can be dam-aged by a lightning strike to the power line or the an-
22 Safety precautions 9
tenna cable Always disconnect the power plug and theantenna cable
bull Never open the digital receiver casing under any cir-cumstances Warranty claims are excluded for the dam-age resulting from improper handling
bull Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servic-ing is required when the digital receiver has been dam-aged in any way such as power-supply cord or plug isdamaged liquid has been spilt or objects have fallen intothe digital receiver the digital receiver has been exposedto rain or moisture does not operate normally or hasbeen dropped
Table 21 Power specification
Input voltage 90 to 250 V AC 5060 HzPower consumption Running Max 28 W
Standby 10 W
Table 22 Physical specification
Size 430 times 60 times 265 mmWeight 43 kgOperating temperature 0 to 45 degCStorage humidity 5 to 95 RH
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
2 Introduction
vices a selection of television and radio services have alreadybeen programmed for you So all broadcasting services thathave gone on air are available to you You can find the latesttransponder information from various broadcasters on tele-text
The TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece digital receiver has features asfollows
bull The digtial receiver is able to memorize up to 2000 tele-vision and radio services
bull Electronic Program Guide (EPG) provides an overviewof program schedules for next few hours
bull You can edit the service list and make your own favoriteservice list
bull You can view the information of a current television orradio program
bull You can update the firmware of the digital receiver tothe latest which will be provided by Topfield
bull The digital receiver features a digital video recorder withtwo tuners with which you can record your choice ofbroadcasting services independently of ones you are cur-rently watching
bull The large storage capacity of the built-in hard disk al-lows you to record up to 40 hours of materialmdashin caseof 80 gigabytesmdashin excellent picture and sound quality
bull Time shift function is a special technical feature Youcan pause the program you are watching and resume itagain at a later time You can quickly find whatever partof the current program by reverse or forward search
bull During a recording in progress you can select a differentprogram from the archive and watch it
12 Controlling the digital receiver 3
12 Controlling the digital receiver
You can control the digital receiver with the remote controland the front panel buttons
NOTE When the digital receiver is off but plugged to a walloutlet we say that it is in standby mode on the otherhand when it is on it is in operation mode You shouldkeep the digital receiver plugged to a wall outlet so asit can run timer events
121 The front panel
STANDBY button toggles the digital receiver between oper-ation mode and standby mode
CHANNELac buttons switch to another service and movethe highlight bar vertically in a menu
VOLUMEbd buttons change the volume and select anoption in a menu
Status display displays a current time in standby mode anddisplays a current status of the digital receiver in op-eration mode
4 Introduction
122 The remote control
1⃝ button toggles the digital re-ceiver between operation modeand standby mode
2⃝ button mutes the television oraudio appliance
3⃝ currenpound iexclcentUHF button displays the RF set-ting menu For more descrip-tions refer to sect 326
4⃝ button toggles operation be-tween the digital receiver andyour video recorder For moredescriptions refer to sect 323
5⃝ button sets a sleep timer Thedigital receiver is turned off tostandby mode when a specifiedduration is elapsed
6⃝ Numeral buttons are used tospecify a service to watch or a pa-rameter such as timer
7⃝ button makes a return to theprevious service
8⃝ button displays the informa-tion about the program on the air
9⃝currenpound iexclcentGUIDE button displays an electronic program guide
10⃝ button toggles between TV mode and radio mode
11⃝ currenpound iexclcentMENU button displays the menu or escapes to a higherlevel menu out of a submenu
12⃝ button is used to select an audio track a sound mode
12 Controlling the digital receiver 5
or a multifeed if available
13⃝ currenpound iexclcentV+ currenpound iexclcentVminus buttons change the volume and select an op-
tion in a menu
14⃝ currenpound iexclcentP+ currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons switch to another service and move
the highlight bar vertically in a menu
15⃝currenpound iexclcentOK button displays the service list and selects an entryin a menu or list
16⃝ currenpound iexclcentFAV button displays the favorite service list
17⃝ button is used to select a subtitle track if available
18⃝ currenpound iexclcentEXIT button escapes from any menu
19⃝ button displays teletext if available
20⃝ button starts backward playback or backward scan
21⃝ button starts a playback
22⃝ button starts forward scan
23⃝ button starts slow playback
24⃝ button stops a playback
25⃝ button starts a recording
26⃝ button captures a picture from a live show Thisbutton also pauses a playback
27⃝ button moves the position of subpicture counter-colckwise
28⃝ button moves the position of subpicture clockwise
29⃝currenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges a main-picture with a subpic-ture
30⃝ button displays resizes and hides a subpicture
31⃝ button makes a a bookmark during a playback or atime shift
6 Introduction
32⃝ button plays back from a next bookmark position
33⃝ button is used to edit a recording file
34⃝ button displays recording file list MP3 file list orapplication file list For more descriptions refer to sect 74
35⃝ button displays a service list for subpicture or spec-ifies a block for a repeated playback
36⃝currenpound iexclcentNP button is unavailable for this model
If you do not have wide-screen television but normal screentelevision pressing the
currenpound iexclcent0 button changes depending on broad-casting conditions the display format as follows
43 Center Extract rarr 43 Letter Box rarr 169 Full screen
and buttons have additional differentfunctions per menu besides their own function Their func-tions will be guided in the help window on a menu screen
If the remote control does not work please check the remotecontrol mode There are 4 modes with this remote control Youcan alter the mode by pressing two buttons simultaneously asfollows
bull Mode 1 +currenpound iexclcent1
bull Mode 2 +currenpound iexclcent2
bull Mode 3 +currenpound iexclcent3
bull Mode 4 +currenpound iexclcent4
The mode 1 will work at default
7
Chapter 2
Installation
21 Packing contents
Before going any further check that you have received the fol-lowing items with your digital receiver
bull Remote control unitbull Two batteries for the remote control (AAA 15 V)bull One loop cable to link the first tuner with the second
tunerbull One SCART-to-component cable to link the digital re-
ceiver to your television setbull One RCA cable to link the digital receiver to your tele-
vision setbull A copy of this user guide
22 Safety precautions
Please read and keep the following safety precautions care-fully for your safety
bull The power must be 90 to 250 volt Check it before con-
8 Installation
necting the digital receiver to the wall outlet For thepower cunsumption of the digital receiver refer to Ta-ble 21
bull The wall outlet shall be installed near the equipment andshall be easily accessible
bull The digital receiver is designed to receive record andplay back video and audio signals Any other use is ex-pressly prohibited
bull When setting up the digital receiver make sure it is in ahorizontal position
bull Do not expose the digital receiver to any moisture Thedigital receiver is designed for use in dry rooms If youdo use it outdoors ensure that it is protected from mois-ture such as rain or splashing water Do not place anyvessels such as vases on the digital receiver These maybe knocked over and spill fluid on the electrical compo-nents thus bring about a risk
bull Use only dry cloth when cleaning the digital receiver
bull Do not place the digital receiver close to heating units orin direct sunlight as this will impair cooling Place thedigital receiver on a hard level surface Do not lay anyobjects such as magazines on the digital receiver Whenplaced in a cabinet make sure there is a minimum spaceof 10 cm around it For the physical specification of thedigital receiver refer to Table 22
bull Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinchedparticularly at plugs receptacles and the point wherethey exit from the digital receiver
bull Only use accessories specified by the manufacturer
bull Thunderstroms are a danger to all of electrical devicesEven if the digital receiver is switched off it can be dam-aged by a lightning strike to the power line or the an-
22 Safety precautions 9
tenna cable Always disconnect the power plug and theantenna cable
bull Never open the digital receiver casing under any cir-cumstances Warranty claims are excluded for the dam-age resulting from improper handling
bull Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servic-ing is required when the digital receiver has been dam-aged in any way such as power-supply cord or plug isdamaged liquid has been spilt or objects have fallen intothe digital receiver the digital receiver has been exposedto rain or moisture does not operate normally or hasbeen dropped
Table 21 Power specification
Input voltage 90 to 250 V AC 5060 HzPower consumption Running Max 28 W
Standby 10 W
Table 22 Physical specification
Size 430 times 60 times 265 mmWeight 43 kgOperating temperature 0 to 45 degCStorage humidity 5 to 95 RH
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
12 Controlling the digital receiver 3
12 Controlling the digital receiver
You can control the digital receiver with the remote controland the front panel buttons
NOTE When the digital receiver is off but plugged to a walloutlet we say that it is in standby mode on the otherhand when it is on it is in operation mode You shouldkeep the digital receiver plugged to a wall outlet so asit can run timer events
121 The front panel
STANDBY button toggles the digital receiver between oper-ation mode and standby mode
CHANNELac buttons switch to another service and movethe highlight bar vertically in a menu
VOLUMEbd buttons change the volume and select anoption in a menu
Status display displays a current time in standby mode anddisplays a current status of the digital receiver in op-eration mode
4 Introduction
122 The remote control
1⃝ button toggles the digital re-ceiver between operation modeand standby mode
2⃝ button mutes the television oraudio appliance
3⃝ currenpound iexclcentUHF button displays the RF set-ting menu For more descrip-tions refer to sect 326
4⃝ button toggles operation be-tween the digital receiver andyour video recorder For moredescriptions refer to sect 323
5⃝ button sets a sleep timer Thedigital receiver is turned off tostandby mode when a specifiedduration is elapsed
6⃝ Numeral buttons are used tospecify a service to watch or a pa-rameter such as timer
7⃝ button makes a return to theprevious service
8⃝ button displays the informa-tion about the program on the air
9⃝currenpound iexclcentGUIDE button displays an electronic program guide
10⃝ button toggles between TV mode and radio mode
11⃝ currenpound iexclcentMENU button displays the menu or escapes to a higherlevel menu out of a submenu
12⃝ button is used to select an audio track a sound mode
12 Controlling the digital receiver 5
or a multifeed if available
13⃝ currenpound iexclcentV+ currenpound iexclcentVminus buttons change the volume and select an op-
tion in a menu
14⃝ currenpound iexclcentP+ currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons switch to another service and move
the highlight bar vertically in a menu
15⃝currenpound iexclcentOK button displays the service list and selects an entryin a menu or list
16⃝ currenpound iexclcentFAV button displays the favorite service list
17⃝ button is used to select a subtitle track if available
18⃝ currenpound iexclcentEXIT button escapes from any menu
19⃝ button displays teletext if available
20⃝ button starts backward playback or backward scan
21⃝ button starts a playback
22⃝ button starts forward scan
23⃝ button starts slow playback
24⃝ button stops a playback
25⃝ button starts a recording
26⃝ button captures a picture from a live show Thisbutton also pauses a playback
27⃝ button moves the position of subpicture counter-colckwise
28⃝ button moves the position of subpicture clockwise
29⃝currenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges a main-picture with a subpic-ture
30⃝ button displays resizes and hides a subpicture
31⃝ button makes a a bookmark during a playback or atime shift
6 Introduction
32⃝ button plays back from a next bookmark position
33⃝ button is used to edit a recording file
34⃝ button displays recording file list MP3 file list orapplication file list For more descriptions refer to sect 74
35⃝ button displays a service list for subpicture or spec-ifies a block for a repeated playback
36⃝currenpound iexclcentNP button is unavailable for this model
If you do not have wide-screen television but normal screentelevision pressing the
currenpound iexclcent0 button changes depending on broad-casting conditions the display format as follows
43 Center Extract rarr 43 Letter Box rarr 169 Full screen
and buttons have additional differentfunctions per menu besides their own function Their func-tions will be guided in the help window on a menu screen
If the remote control does not work please check the remotecontrol mode There are 4 modes with this remote control Youcan alter the mode by pressing two buttons simultaneously asfollows
bull Mode 1 +currenpound iexclcent1
bull Mode 2 +currenpound iexclcent2
bull Mode 3 +currenpound iexclcent3
bull Mode 4 +currenpound iexclcent4
The mode 1 will work at default
7
Chapter 2
Installation
21 Packing contents
Before going any further check that you have received the fol-lowing items with your digital receiver
bull Remote control unitbull Two batteries for the remote control (AAA 15 V)bull One loop cable to link the first tuner with the second
tunerbull One SCART-to-component cable to link the digital re-
ceiver to your television setbull One RCA cable to link the digital receiver to your tele-
vision setbull A copy of this user guide
22 Safety precautions
Please read and keep the following safety precautions care-fully for your safety
bull The power must be 90 to 250 volt Check it before con-
8 Installation
necting the digital receiver to the wall outlet For thepower cunsumption of the digital receiver refer to Ta-ble 21
bull The wall outlet shall be installed near the equipment andshall be easily accessible
bull The digital receiver is designed to receive record andplay back video and audio signals Any other use is ex-pressly prohibited
bull When setting up the digital receiver make sure it is in ahorizontal position
bull Do not expose the digital receiver to any moisture Thedigital receiver is designed for use in dry rooms If youdo use it outdoors ensure that it is protected from mois-ture such as rain or splashing water Do not place anyvessels such as vases on the digital receiver These maybe knocked over and spill fluid on the electrical compo-nents thus bring about a risk
bull Use only dry cloth when cleaning the digital receiver
bull Do not place the digital receiver close to heating units orin direct sunlight as this will impair cooling Place thedigital receiver on a hard level surface Do not lay anyobjects such as magazines on the digital receiver Whenplaced in a cabinet make sure there is a minimum spaceof 10 cm around it For the physical specification of thedigital receiver refer to Table 22
bull Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinchedparticularly at plugs receptacles and the point wherethey exit from the digital receiver
bull Only use accessories specified by the manufacturer
bull Thunderstroms are a danger to all of electrical devicesEven if the digital receiver is switched off it can be dam-aged by a lightning strike to the power line or the an-
22 Safety precautions 9
tenna cable Always disconnect the power plug and theantenna cable
bull Never open the digital receiver casing under any cir-cumstances Warranty claims are excluded for the dam-age resulting from improper handling
bull Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servic-ing is required when the digital receiver has been dam-aged in any way such as power-supply cord or plug isdamaged liquid has been spilt or objects have fallen intothe digital receiver the digital receiver has been exposedto rain or moisture does not operate normally or hasbeen dropped
Table 21 Power specification
Input voltage 90 to 250 V AC 5060 HzPower consumption Running Max 28 W
Standby 10 W
Table 22 Physical specification
Size 430 times 60 times 265 mmWeight 43 kgOperating temperature 0 to 45 degCStorage humidity 5 to 95 RH
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
4 Introduction
122 The remote control
1⃝ button toggles the digital re-ceiver between operation modeand standby mode
2⃝ button mutes the television oraudio appliance
3⃝ currenpound iexclcentUHF button displays the RF set-ting menu For more descrip-tions refer to sect 326
4⃝ button toggles operation be-tween the digital receiver andyour video recorder For moredescriptions refer to sect 323
5⃝ button sets a sleep timer Thedigital receiver is turned off tostandby mode when a specifiedduration is elapsed
6⃝ Numeral buttons are used tospecify a service to watch or a pa-rameter such as timer
7⃝ button makes a return to theprevious service
8⃝ button displays the informa-tion about the program on the air
9⃝currenpound iexclcentGUIDE button displays an electronic program guide
10⃝ button toggles between TV mode and radio mode
11⃝ currenpound iexclcentMENU button displays the menu or escapes to a higherlevel menu out of a submenu
12⃝ button is used to select an audio track a sound mode
12 Controlling the digital receiver 5
or a multifeed if available
13⃝ currenpound iexclcentV+ currenpound iexclcentVminus buttons change the volume and select an op-
tion in a menu
14⃝ currenpound iexclcentP+ currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons switch to another service and move
the highlight bar vertically in a menu
15⃝currenpound iexclcentOK button displays the service list and selects an entryin a menu or list
16⃝ currenpound iexclcentFAV button displays the favorite service list
17⃝ button is used to select a subtitle track if available
18⃝ currenpound iexclcentEXIT button escapes from any menu
19⃝ button displays teletext if available
20⃝ button starts backward playback or backward scan
21⃝ button starts a playback
22⃝ button starts forward scan
23⃝ button starts slow playback
24⃝ button stops a playback
25⃝ button starts a recording
26⃝ button captures a picture from a live show Thisbutton also pauses a playback
27⃝ button moves the position of subpicture counter-colckwise
28⃝ button moves the position of subpicture clockwise
29⃝currenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges a main-picture with a subpic-ture
30⃝ button displays resizes and hides a subpicture
31⃝ button makes a a bookmark during a playback or atime shift
6 Introduction
32⃝ button plays back from a next bookmark position
33⃝ button is used to edit a recording file
34⃝ button displays recording file list MP3 file list orapplication file list For more descriptions refer to sect 74
35⃝ button displays a service list for subpicture or spec-ifies a block for a repeated playback
36⃝currenpound iexclcentNP button is unavailable for this model
If you do not have wide-screen television but normal screentelevision pressing the
currenpound iexclcent0 button changes depending on broad-casting conditions the display format as follows
43 Center Extract rarr 43 Letter Box rarr 169 Full screen
and buttons have additional differentfunctions per menu besides their own function Their func-tions will be guided in the help window on a menu screen
If the remote control does not work please check the remotecontrol mode There are 4 modes with this remote control Youcan alter the mode by pressing two buttons simultaneously asfollows
bull Mode 1 +currenpound iexclcent1
bull Mode 2 +currenpound iexclcent2
bull Mode 3 +currenpound iexclcent3
bull Mode 4 +currenpound iexclcent4
The mode 1 will work at default
7
Chapter 2
Installation
21 Packing contents
Before going any further check that you have received the fol-lowing items with your digital receiver
bull Remote control unitbull Two batteries for the remote control (AAA 15 V)bull One loop cable to link the first tuner with the second
tunerbull One SCART-to-component cable to link the digital re-
ceiver to your television setbull One RCA cable to link the digital receiver to your tele-
vision setbull A copy of this user guide
22 Safety precautions
Please read and keep the following safety precautions care-fully for your safety
bull The power must be 90 to 250 volt Check it before con-
8 Installation
necting the digital receiver to the wall outlet For thepower cunsumption of the digital receiver refer to Ta-ble 21
bull The wall outlet shall be installed near the equipment andshall be easily accessible
bull The digital receiver is designed to receive record andplay back video and audio signals Any other use is ex-pressly prohibited
bull When setting up the digital receiver make sure it is in ahorizontal position
bull Do not expose the digital receiver to any moisture Thedigital receiver is designed for use in dry rooms If youdo use it outdoors ensure that it is protected from mois-ture such as rain or splashing water Do not place anyvessels such as vases on the digital receiver These maybe knocked over and spill fluid on the electrical compo-nents thus bring about a risk
bull Use only dry cloth when cleaning the digital receiver
bull Do not place the digital receiver close to heating units orin direct sunlight as this will impair cooling Place thedigital receiver on a hard level surface Do not lay anyobjects such as magazines on the digital receiver Whenplaced in a cabinet make sure there is a minimum spaceof 10 cm around it For the physical specification of thedigital receiver refer to Table 22
bull Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinchedparticularly at plugs receptacles and the point wherethey exit from the digital receiver
bull Only use accessories specified by the manufacturer
bull Thunderstroms are a danger to all of electrical devicesEven if the digital receiver is switched off it can be dam-aged by a lightning strike to the power line or the an-
22 Safety precautions 9
tenna cable Always disconnect the power plug and theantenna cable
bull Never open the digital receiver casing under any cir-cumstances Warranty claims are excluded for the dam-age resulting from improper handling
bull Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servic-ing is required when the digital receiver has been dam-aged in any way such as power-supply cord or plug isdamaged liquid has been spilt or objects have fallen intothe digital receiver the digital receiver has been exposedto rain or moisture does not operate normally or hasbeen dropped
Table 21 Power specification
Input voltage 90 to 250 V AC 5060 HzPower consumption Running Max 28 W
Standby 10 W
Table 22 Physical specification
Size 430 times 60 times 265 mmWeight 43 kgOperating temperature 0 to 45 degCStorage humidity 5 to 95 RH
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
12 Controlling the digital receiver 5
or a multifeed if available
13⃝ currenpound iexclcentV+ currenpound iexclcentVminus buttons change the volume and select an op-
tion in a menu
14⃝ currenpound iexclcentP+ currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons switch to another service and move
the highlight bar vertically in a menu
15⃝currenpound iexclcentOK button displays the service list and selects an entryin a menu or list
16⃝ currenpound iexclcentFAV button displays the favorite service list
17⃝ button is used to select a subtitle track if available
18⃝ currenpound iexclcentEXIT button escapes from any menu
19⃝ button displays teletext if available
20⃝ button starts backward playback or backward scan
21⃝ button starts a playback
22⃝ button starts forward scan
23⃝ button starts slow playback
24⃝ button stops a playback
25⃝ button starts a recording
26⃝ button captures a picture from a live show Thisbutton also pauses a playback
27⃝ button moves the position of subpicture counter-colckwise
28⃝ button moves the position of subpicture clockwise
29⃝currenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges a main-picture with a subpic-ture
30⃝ button displays resizes and hides a subpicture
31⃝ button makes a a bookmark during a playback or atime shift
6 Introduction
32⃝ button plays back from a next bookmark position
33⃝ button is used to edit a recording file
34⃝ button displays recording file list MP3 file list orapplication file list For more descriptions refer to sect 74
35⃝ button displays a service list for subpicture or spec-ifies a block for a repeated playback
36⃝currenpound iexclcentNP button is unavailable for this model
If you do not have wide-screen television but normal screentelevision pressing the
currenpound iexclcent0 button changes depending on broad-casting conditions the display format as follows
43 Center Extract rarr 43 Letter Box rarr 169 Full screen
and buttons have additional differentfunctions per menu besides their own function Their func-tions will be guided in the help window on a menu screen
If the remote control does not work please check the remotecontrol mode There are 4 modes with this remote control Youcan alter the mode by pressing two buttons simultaneously asfollows
bull Mode 1 +currenpound iexclcent1
bull Mode 2 +currenpound iexclcent2
bull Mode 3 +currenpound iexclcent3
bull Mode 4 +currenpound iexclcent4
The mode 1 will work at default
7
Chapter 2
Installation
21 Packing contents
Before going any further check that you have received the fol-lowing items with your digital receiver
bull Remote control unitbull Two batteries for the remote control (AAA 15 V)bull One loop cable to link the first tuner with the second
tunerbull One SCART-to-component cable to link the digital re-
ceiver to your television setbull One RCA cable to link the digital receiver to your tele-
vision setbull A copy of this user guide
22 Safety precautions
Please read and keep the following safety precautions care-fully for your safety
bull The power must be 90 to 250 volt Check it before con-
8 Installation
necting the digital receiver to the wall outlet For thepower cunsumption of the digital receiver refer to Ta-ble 21
bull The wall outlet shall be installed near the equipment andshall be easily accessible
bull The digital receiver is designed to receive record andplay back video and audio signals Any other use is ex-pressly prohibited
bull When setting up the digital receiver make sure it is in ahorizontal position
bull Do not expose the digital receiver to any moisture Thedigital receiver is designed for use in dry rooms If youdo use it outdoors ensure that it is protected from mois-ture such as rain or splashing water Do not place anyvessels such as vases on the digital receiver These maybe knocked over and spill fluid on the electrical compo-nents thus bring about a risk
bull Use only dry cloth when cleaning the digital receiver
bull Do not place the digital receiver close to heating units orin direct sunlight as this will impair cooling Place thedigital receiver on a hard level surface Do not lay anyobjects such as magazines on the digital receiver Whenplaced in a cabinet make sure there is a minimum spaceof 10 cm around it For the physical specification of thedigital receiver refer to Table 22
bull Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinchedparticularly at plugs receptacles and the point wherethey exit from the digital receiver
bull Only use accessories specified by the manufacturer
bull Thunderstroms are a danger to all of electrical devicesEven if the digital receiver is switched off it can be dam-aged by a lightning strike to the power line or the an-
22 Safety precautions 9
tenna cable Always disconnect the power plug and theantenna cable
bull Never open the digital receiver casing under any cir-cumstances Warranty claims are excluded for the dam-age resulting from improper handling
bull Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servic-ing is required when the digital receiver has been dam-aged in any way such as power-supply cord or plug isdamaged liquid has been spilt or objects have fallen intothe digital receiver the digital receiver has been exposedto rain or moisture does not operate normally or hasbeen dropped
Table 21 Power specification
Input voltage 90 to 250 V AC 5060 HzPower consumption Running Max 28 W
Standby 10 W
Table 22 Physical specification
Size 430 times 60 times 265 mmWeight 43 kgOperating temperature 0 to 45 degCStorage humidity 5 to 95 RH
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
6 Introduction
32⃝ button plays back from a next bookmark position
33⃝ button is used to edit a recording file
34⃝ button displays recording file list MP3 file list orapplication file list For more descriptions refer to sect 74
35⃝ button displays a service list for subpicture or spec-ifies a block for a repeated playback
36⃝currenpound iexclcentNP button is unavailable for this model
If you do not have wide-screen television but normal screentelevision pressing the
currenpound iexclcent0 button changes depending on broad-casting conditions the display format as follows
43 Center Extract rarr 43 Letter Box rarr 169 Full screen
and buttons have additional differentfunctions per menu besides their own function Their func-tions will be guided in the help window on a menu screen
If the remote control does not work please check the remotecontrol mode There are 4 modes with this remote control Youcan alter the mode by pressing two buttons simultaneously asfollows
bull Mode 1 +currenpound iexclcent1
bull Mode 2 +currenpound iexclcent2
bull Mode 3 +currenpound iexclcent3
bull Mode 4 +currenpound iexclcent4
The mode 1 will work at default
7
Chapter 2
Installation
21 Packing contents
Before going any further check that you have received the fol-lowing items with your digital receiver
bull Remote control unitbull Two batteries for the remote control (AAA 15 V)bull One loop cable to link the first tuner with the second
tunerbull One SCART-to-component cable to link the digital re-
ceiver to your television setbull One RCA cable to link the digital receiver to your tele-
vision setbull A copy of this user guide
22 Safety precautions
Please read and keep the following safety precautions care-fully for your safety
bull The power must be 90 to 250 volt Check it before con-
8 Installation
necting the digital receiver to the wall outlet For thepower cunsumption of the digital receiver refer to Ta-ble 21
bull The wall outlet shall be installed near the equipment andshall be easily accessible
bull The digital receiver is designed to receive record andplay back video and audio signals Any other use is ex-pressly prohibited
bull When setting up the digital receiver make sure it is in ahorizontal position
bull Do not expose the digital receiver to any moisture Thedigital receiver is designed for use in dry rooms If youdo use it outdoors ensure that it is protected from mois-ture such as rain or splashing water Do not place anyvessels such as vases on the digital receiver These maybe knocked over and spill fluid on the electrical compo-nents thus bring about a risk
bull Use only dry cloth when cleaning the digital receiver
bull Do not place the digital receiver close to heating units orin direct sunlight as this will impair cooling Place thedigital receiver on a hard level surface Do not lay anyobjects such as magazines on the digital receiver Whenplaced in a cabinet make sure there is a minimum spaceof 10 cm around it For the physical specification of thedigital receiver refer to Table 22
bull Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinchedparticularly at plugs receptacles and the point wherethey exit from the digital receiver
bull Only use accessories specified by the manufacturer
bull Thunderstroms are a danger to all of electrical devicesEven if the digital receiver is switched off it can be dam-aged by a lightning strike to the power line or the an-
22 Safety precautions 9
tenna cable Always disconnect the power plug and theantenna cable
bull Never open the digital receiver casing under any cir-cumstances Warranty claims are excluded for the dam-age resulting from improper handling
bull Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servic-ing is required when the digital receiver has been dam-aged in any way such as power-supply cord or plug isdamaged liquid has been spilt or objects have fallen intothe digital receiver the digital receiver has been exposedto rain or moisture does not operate normally or hasbeen dropped
Table 21 Power specification
Input voltage 90 to 250 V AC 5060 HzPower consumption Running Max 28 W
Standby 10 W
Table 22 Physical specification
Size 430 times 60 times 265 mmWeight 43 kgOperating temperature 0 to 45 degCStorage humidity 5 to 95 RH
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
7
Chapter 2
Installation
21 Packing contents
Before going any further check that you have received the fol-lowing items with your digital receiver
bull Remote control unitbull Two batteries for the remote control (AAA 15 V)bull One loop cable to link the first tuner with the second
tunerbull One SCART-to-component cable to link the digital re-
ceiver to your television setbull One RCA cable to link the digital receiver to your tele-
vision setbull A copy of this user guide
22 Safety precautions
Please read and keep the following safety precautions care-fully for your safety
bull The power must be 90 to 250 volt Check it before con-
8 Installation
necting the digital receiver to the wall outlet For thepower cunsumption of the digital receiver refer to Ta-ble 21
bull The wall outlet shall be installed near the equipment andshall be easily accessible
bull The digital receiver is designed to receive record andplay back video and audio signals Any other use is ex-pressly prohibited
bull When setting up the digital receiver make sure it is in ahorizontal position
bull Do not expose the digital receiver to any moisture Thedigital receiver is designed for use in dry rooms If youdo use it outdoors ensure that it is protected from mois-ture such as rain or splashing water Do not place anyvessels such as vases on the digital receiver These maybe knocked over and spill fluid on the electrical compo-nents thus bring about a risk
bull Use only dry cloth when cleaning the digital receiver
bull Do not place the digital receiver close to heating units orin direct sunlight as this will impair cooling Place thedigital receiver on a hard level surface Do not lay anyobjects such as magazines on the digital receiver Whenplaced in a cabinet make sure there is a minimum spaceof 10 cm around it For the physical specification of thedigital receiver refer to Table 22
bull Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinchedparticularly at plugs receptacles and the point wherethey exit from the digital receiver
bull Only use accessories specified by the manufacturer
bull Thunderstroms are a danger to all of electrical devicesEven if the digital receiver is switched off it can be dam-aged by a lightning strike to the power line or the an-
22 Safety precautions 9
tenna cable Always disconnect the power plug and theantenna cable
bull Never open the digital receiver casing under any cir-cumstances Warranty claims are excluded for the dam-age resulting from improper handling
bull Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servic-ing is required when the digital receiver has been dam-aged in any way such as power-supply cord or plug isdamaged liquid has been spilt or objects have fallen intothe digital receiver the digital receiver has been exposedto rain or moisture does not operate normally or hasbeen dropped
Table 21 Power specification
Input voltage 90 to 250 V AC 5060 HzPower consumption Running Max 28 W
Standby 10 W
Table 22 Physical specification
Size 430 times 60 times 265 mmWeight 43 kgOperating temperature 0 to 45 degCStorage humidity 5 to 95 RH
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
8 Installation
necting the digital receiver to the wall outlet For thepower cunsumption of the digital receiver refer to Ta-ble 21
bull The wall outlet shall be installed near the equipment andshall be easily accessible
bull The digital receiver is designed to receive record andplay back video and audio signals Any other use is ex-pressly prohibited
bull When setting up the digital receiver make sure it is in ahorizontal position
bull Do not expose the digital receiver to any moisture Thedigital receiver is designed for use in dry rooms If youdo use it outdoors ensure that it is protected from mois-ture such as rain or splashing water Do not place anyvessels such as vases on the digital receiver These maybe knocked over and spill fluid on the electrical compo-nents thus bring about a risk
bull Use only dry cloth when cleaning the digital receiver
bull Do not place the digital receiver close to heating units orin direct sunlight as this will impair cooling Place thedigital receiver on a hard level surface Do not lay anyobjects such as magazines on the digital receiver Whenplaced in a cabinet make sure there is a minimum spaceof 10 cm around it For the physical specification of thedigital receiver refer to Table 22
bull Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinchedparticularly at plugs receptacles and the point wherethey exit from the digital receiver
bull Only use accessories specified by the manufacturer
bull Thunderstroms are a danger to all of electrical devicesEven if the digital receiver is switched off it can be dam-aged by a lightning strike to the power line or the an-
22 Safety precautions 9
tenna cable Always disconnect the power plug and theantenna cable
bull Never open the digital receiver casing under any cir-cumstances Warranty claims are excluded for the dam-age resulting from improper handling
bull Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servic-ing is required when the digital receiver has been dam-aged in any way such as power-supply cord or plug isdamaged liquid has been spilt or objects have fallen intothe digital receiver the digital receiver has been exposedto rain or moisture does not operate normally or hasbeen dropped
Table 21 Power specification
Input voltage 90 to 250 V AC 5060 HzPower consumption Running Max 28 W
Standby 10 W
Table 22 Physical specification
Size 430 times 60 times 265 mmWeight 43 kgOperating temperature 0 to 45 degCStorage humidity 5 to 95 RH
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
22 Safety precautions 9
tenna cable Always disconnect the power plug and theantenna cable
bull Never open the digital receiver casing under any cir-cumstances Warranty claims are excluded for the dam-age resulting from improper handling
bull Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servic-ing is required when the digital receiver has been dam-aged in any way such as power-supply cord or plug isdamaged liquid has been spilt or objects have fallen intothe digital receiver the digital receiver has been exposedto rain or moisture does not operate normally or hasbeen dropped
Table 21 Power specification
Input voltage 90 to 250 V AC 5060 HzPower consumption Running Max 28 W
Standby 10 W
Table 22 Physical specification
Size 430 times 60 times 265 mmWeight 43 kgOperating temperature 0 to 45 degCStorage humidity 5 to 95 RH
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
10 Installation
23 Rear panel connections
2
1 3
4 137 9 10
11
14
5
6
8
12
ANT 1
RF LOOP 1 OUT RF LOOP 2 OUT AUDIO
L
R
S-VIDEO VCR USB
RF IN
SPDIF RS-232
VIDEO
TV
RF OUT
ANT 2
1⃝ ANT 1 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 1sttuner
2⃝ RF LOOP 1 OUT Broadcasting output socket through ANT1 IN for another digital receiver
3⃝ ANT 2 IN Broadcasting input socket for the 2ndtuner
4⃝ RF LOOP 2 OUT Broadcasting output socket through sec-ondtunerin for another digital receiver
5⃝ VIDEO Composite video output socket for thetelevision or the video receiver
6⃝ AUDIO LR Stereo audio output socekt for the tele-vision or the audio system
7⃝ S-VIDEO Super video output socket for the tele-vision
8⃝ TV Audio and video output socket for thetelevision
9⃝ VCR Audio and video input output socketfor the video recorder
10⃝ RF IN Analog television input socket
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
24 Connecting the digital receiver 11
11⃝ RF OUT Analog television output socket
12⃝ SPDIF Dolby Digital output socket for the au-dio system
13⃝ USB USB port for firmware update and datatransfer
14⃝ RS-232 Serial port for firmware update and datatransfer
Table 23 Connectors specification
TV SCART CVBS S-Video RGB YUV video outputLeft amp right audio output
VCR SCART CVBS video outputLeft amp right audio outputCVBS S-Video RGB YUV video input for bypassLeft amp right audio input for bypass
S-Video S-Video outputRCA AV Composite video output
Left amp right audio outputSPDIF Dolby Digital audio outputRS-232 9 pin D-sub type
Transfer rate 1152 kbps at maximumUSB 20 Device
24 Connecting the digital receiver
There are several ways to install the digital receiver as de-scribed below Install the digital receiver suitably to your tele-vision and other appliances If you have any problem withyour installation or need a help contact your dealer or serviceprovider
You should configure audio and video settings after installa-tion For detailed descriptions about audio and video settingsrefer to sect 32
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
12 Installation
Connecting to the terrestrial antenna
Connect the antenna cable to the ANT 1 IN socket on the digitalreceiver and then connect the RF LOOP 1 OUT socket and theANT 2 IN socket with a loop-through cable
If you have another digital receiver plug another cable intothe RF LOOP 2 OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding socket on the other digital receiver
Connecting to the television by SCART connector
Plug a SCART cable into the TV socket on the digital receiverand the corresponding SCART socket on your television
Connecting to the television by RCA connector
Plug a RCA cable into the VIDEO (yellow) AUDIO L (white)and AUDIO R (red) sockets on the digital receiver and the cor-responding input sockets on your television or audio appli-ance
Connecting to the television by S-Video connector
Plug a standard S-Video cable into the S-VIDEO socket on thedigital receiver and the corresponding input socket on yourtelevision You must connect audio sockets on the digital re-ceiver with ones on your television by a RCA cable becausethe S-video socket outputs only video signals
Connecting to the video recorder by SCART connector
Plug one end of the SCART cable into the VCR socket on thedigital receiver Then plug the other end of the SCART ca-ble into the input SCART socket on your video recorder ifyou wish to record a broadcasting program with your videorecorder otherwise if you wish to watch the video that thevideo recorder plays back just through the digital receiverplug the other end into the output SCART socket
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control 13
Connecting to the television by RF connector
Connect the RF LOOP 2 OUT socket and the RF IN socketon the digital receiver with a RF cable and then plug a RFcable into the RF OUT socket on the digital receiver and thecorresponding input socket on your television
25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
To insert the batteries open the battery compartment by re-moving the lid and then insert the batteries observing the po-larity which is marked on the base of the battery compart-ment Close the battery compartment after that
If the digital receiver no longer reacts properly to remote con-trol commands the batteries may be flat Be sure to removeused batteries The manufacturer accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from leaking batteries
NOTE Batteries including those which contain no heavy met-als may not be disposed of with household wastePlease dispose of used batteries in an environmentallysound manner Find out about the legal regulationswhich apply in your area
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
14 Preference Settings
Chapter 3
Preference Settings
31 Language settings
You can designate languages for menu audio track and subti-tle track
To designate the language formenu audio track or subtitletrack select the System Settinggt Language Setting menu
Menu language
The digital receiver supports a lot of menu languages Ara-bic Dutch English German French Italian Russian Turkishand so forth Set the Menu Language option to your desired
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
32 Video and audio settings 15
language Once you select a language the menu will be dis-played in the selected language immediately
Subtitle language
Set the 1st Subtitle Language and 2nd Subtitle Language op-tions to your desired language If a program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Subtitle Languagethat set to the 2nd Subtitle Language option will be output Ifit does not have the secondrsquos subtitle track either no subtitlewill be output
Apart from this setting you can select a subtitle track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select a subtitle track refer to sect 55
Audio language
Set the 1st Audio Language and 2nd Audio Language optionsto your desired language If the program does not have thesubtitle track of the language set to the 1st Audio Languageoption that set to the 2nd Audio Language option will be out-put If it does not have the secondrsquos audio track either anordinary audio track will be output
Apart from this setting you can select an audio track withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descriptionsabout how to select an audio track refer to sect 54
32 Video and audio settings
You have to configure the video and audio settings appropri-ately to your television and appliances
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
16 Preference Settings
To configure the video and au-dio settings select the SystemSetting gt AV Output Settingmenu
321 Televsion standard
The digital receiver supports two types of television standardOne is PAL (Phase Alternating Line) standard and the otheris NTSC (National Television Standards Commitee) standardPAL was adopted in European countries while NTSC is adoptedin USA Canada Mexico and so forth
If you have a PAL televsion you have to set the TV Type op-tion to PAL In this case if a service you wish to watch is NTSCstandard the digital receiver converts it into PAL standard foryour PAL television However its quality would somewhatfall The opposite case brings about the same result
The best thing is to watch PAL services with a PAL televisionand to watch NTSC services with a NTSC television How-ever the auto television is able to process both of them So ifyou have an auto television set the TV Type option to MultiWith this option the digital receiver will output them withoutstandard conversion This setting is most recommended espe-cially if you are not sure what stadard television you have
322 Color model
The type of the socket that reads TV on the back panel ofthe digital receiver is SCART This is also known as Euro-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
32 Video and audio settings 17
connector Through this socket the digital receiver is able tooutput video signals of various color models CVBS (Com-posite Video Baseband Signal) S-Video (Super-Video) YUVand RGB Audio signals are also output together through thissocket
If you have connected the digital receiver and your televsionby this connector you should set the Video Output option toyour desired color model If you have connected them by RCAconnector at which VIDEO reads on the back panel of the dig-ital receiver you do not have to set this option because thedigital receiver outputs CVBS video through RCA connectorindependent of SCART connector
However If you have connected them by S-VIDEO connectoryou have to this option to S-Video because the output throughS-Video connector comes from the SCART interface
It is known in general that YUV color model provides thebest video quality with little difference from RGB color modelwhile CVBS color model does the worst However not all tele-visions with a SCART socket support YUV color model Makesure your television supports YUV color model before settingthe Video Output option to YUV But there would rarely betelevisions that have a SCART socket but do not support RGBcolor model So RGB would be the most desirable value forthis option
323 Video cassette recorder
The SCART socket that reads VCR on the back panel of thedigital receiver is for a video recorder You would have con-nected the digital receiver to your video recorder or such anappliance by this connector
If you have connected the VCR socket to the input SCARTsocket of your video recorder you have to set the VCR ScartType option to Standard If you have connected it to the out-put SCART socket the digital receiver will operate differently
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
18 Preference Settings
depending on the setting of the VCR Scart Type option Ifthe option is set to Standard the digital receiver will pass thevideo from the video recorder to your television when thevideo recorder starts a playback But if the option is set toExternal AV the digital receiver will not pass the video eventhough the video recorder starts a playback To pass it youhave to press button
NOTE In this case it is impossible that the digital receiverrecords the video which the video recorder plays backbecause the digital receiver is just a bypass for the videorecorder
324 Television aspect ratio
If you have a wide-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 169
You can enjoy well both wide-screen programs and normal-screen programs with your wide-screen television as the abovefigures show The left figure shows a wide picture displayedin the wide screen and the right figure shows a normal picturedisplayed in the wide screen
If you have a normal-screen television set the TV Aspect Ratiooption to 43
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
32 Video and audio settings 19
You cannot enjoy well wide-screen programs with your normal-screen television as the above figures show The left figureshows a normal picture displayed in the normal screen Towatch wide-screen programs in the shape like the center fig-ure set the 169 Display Format option to Letter Box thenwide-screen pictures will be reduced to fit to the width of thenormal screen Otherwise to watch them in the shape like theright figure set the option to Center extract then wide-screenpictures will be cut out on the left and right sides equally to fitto the width of the normal screen
325 Sound mode
Basically there are two audio sources as you can find two au-dio sockets on the back panel of the digital receiver You canenjoy only one source or both of them in either stereo or monoSet the Sound Mode option as you desire
Apart from this setting you can change the sound mode withbutton when you watch a program For detailed descrip-
tions about how to change the sound mode refer to sect 54
326 RF output
If you have connected your television to the RF OUT socketyou should configure the RF output The digital receiver canmake an analog television from a digital television and outputit through the RF OUT socket
Set the RF Output option to the television standard that yourcountry supports refering to Table 31
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
20 Preference Settings
Table 31 Television standards by country
Signal type Country
PAL G Australia Austria Cyprus Czech Republic Egypt Estonia Finland Ger-many Greece Iceland Iran Israel Italy Kuwait Latvia Libya Lithua-nia Luxembourg Netherlands New Zealand Norway Portugal SlovakiaSlovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Syria Yugoslavia
PAL I Hong Kong Macau Republic of Ireland South Africa United KingdomPAL K Czech Republic Hungary PolandNTSC M Bahamas Belgium Bolivia Chile Ecuador Fiji Guam Jamaica Mexico
Panama Peru United States Venezuela
Set the RF Channel option to a channel number as you de-sire You have to tune your television to the channel set to thisoption to watch television
If you have connected your analog television antenna to theRF IN you can watch analog broadcasts via the digital re-ceiver
33 Local time setting
You should set your local time with the digital receiver fortimer events
To set the local time select theSystem Setting gt Time Settingmenu
You can set the local time either yourself manually or usingGreenwich Mean Time (GMT) automatically however it is
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
33 Local time setting 21
recommended to use the Greenwich mean time
Table 32 Time offset table
Time offset City
GMT minus 1200 Eniwetok KwajaleinGMT minus 1100 Midway Island SamoaGMT minus 1000 HawaiiGMT minus 0900 AlaskaGMT minus 0800 Pacific Time US CanadaGMT minus 0700 Mountain Time US CanadaGMT minus 0600 Central Time US Canada Mexico CityGMT minus 0500 Eastern Time US Canada Bogota LimaGMT minus 0400 Atlantic Time Canada La PazGMT minus 0330 NewfoundlandGMT minus 0300 Brazil Georgetown Buenos AriesGMT minus 0200 Mid-AtlanticGMT minus 0100 Azores Cape Verde IslandsGMT London Libson CasablancaGMT + 100 Paris Brussels Copenhagen MadridGMT + 200 South Africa KaliningradGMT + 300 Baghdad Riyadh Moscow St PetersburgGMT + 330 TehranGMT + 400 Abu Dhabi Muscat Baku TbilisiGMT + 430 KabulGMT + 500 Ekaterinburg Islamabad Karachi TashkentGMT + 530 Bombay Calcutta Madras New DelhiGMT + 600 Almaty Dhaka ColomboGMT + 700 Bangkok Hanoi JakartaGMT + 800 Beijing Perth Singapore Hong KongGMT + 900 Tokyo Seoul Osaka Sapporo YakutskGMT + 930 Adelaide DarwinGMT + 1000 Eastern Australia Guam VladivostokGMT + 1100 Magadan Solomon Islands New CaledoniaGMT + 1200 Fiji Auckland Wellington Kamchatka
To set the local time using GMT perform the following steps
1 Set the Mode option to Auto
2 Set the Time Offset parameter to the time difference cor-responding to your time zone refering to Table 32
With the above settings the digital receiver will scan all transpon-ders spceified one by one until to get the Greenwich mean
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
22 Preference Settings
time Make sure that your local time is displayed right on theLocal Time parameter
To set the local time yourself set the Mode option to Manualand enter your local time to the Local Time parameter withthe numeral buttons
The time format is daymonthyear 24-hourminute
34 Parental control
In general a television program is labeled a classification ac-cording to the level of violence nudity and language of itscontent When you are watching a program you can checkits program classification on the information box Refer theinformation box to sect 52
You can prevent your children from watching certain programsby specifying a basis classification
To specify a basis classifica-tion select the System Set-ting gt Parental Control menuAt this time you have to en-ter Personal Identification Num-ber (PIN) The default personalidentification number is lsquo0000rsquo
Set the Censorship option to your desired classification amongthe followings
No block restricting no program
Total block restricting every program
G restricting no program G stands for General contentof which is very mild
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
34 Parental control 23
PG restricting PG or above rated programs PG stands forParental Guidance content of which is mild
M restricting M or above rated programs M stands forMature content of which is moderate in impact
MA restricting MA or above rated programs MA standsfor Mature Accompanied content of which is strong
R restricting R rated programs R stands for Restrictedto adults aged 18 years or over content of which is verystrong
AV restricting AV rated programs AV stands for AdultVideo content of which is very hardcore
NOTE If a certain program does not have any classificationinformation your restriction setting will not take ef-fect on it
If anyone try to watch a program that is out of the basis clas-sification the person has to enter the personal identificationnumber To change the number select the Change PIN Codemenu then an input box appears You have to enter your de-sired number twice for confirmation
You can also restrict uses of some menus Selecting the Ac-cess Control menu displays a list of menus that you can lockIf the Time Setting item is set to Locked you have to enterthe personal identification number to use when you have se-lected the Time Setting menu If you enter a wrong numberyou cannot use the menu Similarly you have to enter the per-sonal identification number when you have switched on thedigital receiver if the IRD Lock item is set to Locked IRD (In-tegrated Receiver Decoder) is another name of digital receiverTo release a shut item set it to Unlocked
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
24 Preference Settings
35 Adjusting on-screen display
You can adjust the transparency level of on-screen display Toadjust the transparency level of on-screen display select theSystem Setting menu and set the OSD Transparency optionas you desire Its available range is 0 to 50 percent
You can adjust the display time of the information box Fordetailed descriptions about the information box refer to sect 52To adjust its display time select the System Setting menu andset the Info Box Display Time option as you desire Its avail-able range is 1 to 30 seconds If you set this option to No InfoBox the information box will not displayed when you switchservices however pressing displays the information boxIf you set this option to Never Hide the information box willalways be displayed
You can raise or lower the position of the information box Toadjust its position select the System Setting menu and set theInfo Box Position option as you desire Its available range isminus10 to +3 line The more high the value is set the more lowthe information box will be positioned
36 Enabling the time shift function
You can use time shift function with this digital receiver Toenable the time shift function select the System Setting menuand set the Time Shifting option to Enable For detailed de-scriptions about the time shift function refer to sect 58
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
25
Chapter 4
Service Search
You have to perform service search after installing the digitalreceiver
41 Searching broadcasting services
To perform service search se-lect the Installation gt ServiceSearch menu
If you have an active antenna you should set the AntennaSupply 5V option to on to supply power to the amplifier ofthe antenna The digital receiver will supply the antenna with100 milliampere at maximum
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
26 Service Search
You should set the Search Mode option to Auto at the first ser-vice search after installing the digital receiver The digital re-ceiver will search all available services with automatic searchmode Transponder numbers range from 6 to 12 at VHF and28 to 69 at UHF
To search a certain transponder set the Search Mode optionto Manual and select your desired transponder at the Channelparameter
To search one service of a transponder set the Search Modeoption to Advanced and specify the PIDs of your desired ser-vice at the PID menu with the numeral buttons PID (PacketIdentifier) is a set of numbers that identifies transport streampackets
To start service search select the Service Search commandThen appears a list box in which found services will be listedPress the
currenpound iexclcentOK button to save found services when service searchhas been completed To stop service search on the way or exitwithout saving press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
42 Resetting to factory settings
The digital receiver maintains the following data
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Timer eventsbull Preference settings
You can reset all data of the digital receiver To reset all thedata select the Installation gt Factory Setting menu Then aconfirmation box appears With the Yes reply service entriesfavorite entries and timer events will be all deleted and pref-erence parameters will be reset to the manufacturerrsquos factorysettings
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
27
Chapter 5
Daily Usage
51 Browsing services
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ or
currenpound iexclcentPminus but-ton Pressing button recalls the service you have watchedjust before You can switch to your desried servce by enteringits service number with the numeral buttons You can also se-lect a service to watch in the browsable service list To see thebrowsable service list press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
The service list enumerates thefollowing items
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Transmitting transponder
A dollar mark ($) may be marked on some entries which
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
28 Daily Usage
means pay service You cannot watch pay services with thisreceiver
To select your desired service put the highlight bar on its en-try with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button Thenyour selected service will be shown Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+
button skips over 10 entries up or down Selecting a servicenumber with the numeral buttons puts the highlight bar on itsentry
Pressing the button displays an option box in which youcan do the following things
bull To browse service entries grouped by service provderset the Show Provider option to on You may regard aservice provider as a transponder
bull To rename a current service entry select the Renamecommand then a keyboard appears with which you canenter a name
bull To prevent other family from watching a current serviceentry set the Lock option to Locked You have to enterPIN code when to watch or unlock a locked service
bull To add a current service entry in a favorite group selectthe Add to Fav command then a favorite group list willbe displayed Put the highlight bar of the group list on adesired group and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
Watching a favorite service
You can select a service to watch in the favorite list as well asin the service list To display your favorite list press the
currenpound iexclcentFAV
button then a favorite group list will be displayed Whenevermoving the highlight bar of the group list up or down favoriteservices belonging to a highlighted group are listed
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
52 Viewing program information 29
To select a favorite service ofa group press the
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonthen the highlight bar of thefavorite list becomes movableOnce you select a desired entrywith the
currenpound iexclcentOK button the selectedservice will be shown Oth-erwise to select another grouppress the
currenpound iexclcentVminus button then thehightlight bar of the group listbecomes movable
If you switch to another service after you have selected a fa-vorite service it will be also another favorite service of the se-lected group The digital receiver will remind you what groupyou have selected displaying its name on the right top of thesreen whenever you switch to another service If you wishyou can select all services select the All services entry in thefavorite list
For how to edit the favorite list refer to Chapter 6
52 Viewing program information
Pressing button displays an information box in which youcan verify the followings
bull Service numberbull Service namebull Signal level and qualitybull Program namebull Program classificationbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting timebull Current time
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
30 Daily Usage
In addition you might see the following symbols
bull Subtitle symbol if subtitles are provided on a currentprogram
bull Teletext symbol if teletext is provided on a currentprogram
bull Lock symbol if a current service is locked
bull Dollar symbol $ if a current service is a pay service
bull Multifeed symbol if a current program is providedin multifeed service
Pressing button once more displays detailed informationabout the current program If an electronic program guideis provided on a current service you can see the informationabout next programs with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus orcurrenpound iexclcentV+ button To adjust
the sound volume in this case press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ buttonunceasingly until the sound bar appears and reaches your de-sired degree To hide the information box press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT
button
53 Viewing an electronic program guide
The Electronic Program Guide (EPG) is an application usedwith digital receivers to list current and scheduled programsthat are or will be available on each service with a short sum-mary or commentary for each program
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
54 Selecting an audio track 31
Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button dis-
plays an electronic programguide in which you can see thefollowing things
bull Scheduled programsbull Program commentarybull Broadcasting datebull Broadcasting time
To see detailed information of a desired program entry putthe highlight bar on your choice with the
currenpound iexclcentP+ orcurrenpound iexclcentPminus button
and press button
To switch over to another service press thecurrenpound iexclcentVminus or
currenpound iexclcentV+ button
To see an electronic program guide for radio broadcast pressbutton To turn it back press button again
Pressing the button displays the electronic program guidefor each service To turn it back press the button again
You can make a timer recording by the electronic programguide for which refer to sect 713
54 Selecting an audio track
Some programs are provided with audio tacks of one or morelanguages Pressing button lists if any available audiotracks However if a multifeed service is available at the mo-ment a multifeed service list will be displayed In this caseyou have to press button once more to select an audio trackSelect your desired audio language in the list and it will besounded In addition you could enjoy if available one amongfour sound modes Stereo Mono Left or Right
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
32 Daily Usage
55 Selecting a subtitle track
Some programs are provided with subtitle tracks of one ormore languages When you view an information box a sub-title symbol ( ) will be marked on it if one or more subtitle
tracks are provided If it is press button then availablesubtitle tracks will be listed Select your desired subtitle lan-guage in the list and it will be displayed
56 Viewing a teletext
Some programs are provided together with such profitableinformation as weather reports news or stock quotations bymeans of teletext Televisions are supposed to process tele-text however there rarely are televisions being incapable ofthat Even if your televsion cannot process teletext you canenjoy it with the digital receiver
When you view an information box a teletext symbol ( ) willbe marked on it if it is provided Press button to view ateletext You can zoom in the teletext with the buttonand adjust the transparency of teletext with the buttonTo clear the teletext press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button
57 Selecting a multifeed service
Some pay service provider provides one program through sev-eral services at the same time but with time differences Thoseare called multifeed services
Service No Starting time
101 1300 PM102 1315 PM103 1330 PM104 1345 PM105 1400 PM
For example assume a moviewould be broadcasted throughfive services like the table on theleft Even if you have missed thefirst service you can use the restservice to watch the movie
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
58 Watching by time shift 33
When you view an information box a multifeed symbol ( )will be marked on it if it is available To select a multifeedservice press button then available multifeed services willbe listed Select your desired multifeed service in the list andit will be shown At this time you have to press buttononce more to select an audio track
58 Watching by time shift
When you are watching a program you can reverse and watchit again as if it is a recording This function is called time shiftWhen you are watching a program using the time shift func-tion it is in fact being recorded temporarily
To use the time shift functionthe Time Shifting option have tobe set to Enable Refer the TimeShifting option to sect 36
How to use the time shift func-tion is as follows
1 Press button then a time shift begins as a progressbar appears The progress bar has two pointers One in-dicates recording position and the other indicates play-back position While this bar is on display you can movethe program backward or forward Pressing makesthe progress bar appear and disapper alternatively
2 To find a desired playback position press orbutton unceasingly until find it
3 Pressing the button reverses the program to 10 sec-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
34 Daily Usage
onds back
4 To end time shift display the progress bar withbutton and press button
59 Watching by picture in picture
You can watch two services atthe same time one of which isshown in a subpicture Thisfunction is called Picture-in-Picture (PiP)
How to use the picture-in-picture function is as follows
1 Press the button to display a subpicture in whichanother service will be shown
2 Pressing the button once more minifies the subpic-ture and pressing it once again hides the subpicture
3 Pressing thecurrenpound iexclcentSAT button interchanges the main-picture
with the subpicture Even when you play back a record-ing you can watch a live service in subpicture How-ever the picture interchange will not work in that case
4 Pressing button moves the subpicture counterclock-wise and pressing button moves it clockwise
5 To display a service list for the subpicture press but-ton
6 If both are pay services all the only main-picture will beshown
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
35
Chapter 6
Listing Services
Editing favorite list
You can make your own favorite service list To edit yourfavorite list select the Organizing Favorties menu then an ed-itable favorite list appears
There are a group list on theleft column a favorite list on thecenter column and a service liston the right column
You can add a favorite entry performing the follwoing steps
1 Put the hightlight bar on a desired group entry in thegroup list and press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
36 Listing Services
2 Then the highlight bar of the service list becomes mov-able Put the hightlight bar on a desired service entryand press the
currenpound iexclcentOK button
3 Then the selected service entry is added in the favoritelist You can select more entries to add
4 Press the button to select another group Wheneverpressing the button the highlight bar of each columnbecomes movable in turn
You can add groups up to 30 To add a group select the NEWcommand in the group list then a on-screen keyboard ap-pears
You can move the highlight key horizon-tally with the
currenpound iexclcentVminus andcurrenpound iexclcentV+ buttons and ver-
tically with thecurrenpound iexclcentP+ and
currenpound iexclcentPminus buttons Press-ing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on a key enters the cor-responding letter in the input line
To type lower case letters or numerals select the Other key Todelete a letter put the cursor on a desired letter in the inputline and select the Del key You must select the Save key tocomplete naming Otherwise if you press the
currenpound iexclcentEXIT button itwill not be named
To rename a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to rename and press the button then the on-screenkeyboard will appear likewise
To delete a group put the highlight bar on a desired groupentry to delete and press the button then a confirmationbox appears The selected group will be deleted with the Yesreply
Similarly you can delete a favorite entry with thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button
in the favorite list
To add radio services press button then radio service en-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
37
tries will be listed in the service list To recall the televisionservice list after adding radio services press button again
With your favorite service list you can select your favorite ser-vices more handily Refer to sect 51 for more descriptions
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
38 Recording and Playing Back
Chapter 7
Recording and Playing Back
With one tuner of the digital receiver you can record a serviceand at the same time watch another service if the two servicesare provided thorugh a same transponder The TF 5000 PVRtMasterpiece digital receiver has two tuners so that you canenjoy the following things
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing two other different services only if two or more ser-vices are provided through a same transponder and theother services are provided through another same trans-ponder You can watch two services at the same time us-ing picture-in-picture function in this case For detaileddescription about the picture-in-picture function referto sect 59
bull It is possible to record two different services as watch-ing one of them with time shift function For detaileddescription about the time shift function refer to sect 58
bull It is possible to record two different services as playingback a recording file
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
71 Recording a program 39
71 Recording a program
CircleOnce a recording is started a recording symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds When you are watch-
ing a service different from the service being recorded youcan view a number on the center of the symbol which indi-cates the order that the recording is started The outer circle ofthe recording symbol indicates progress rate
NOTE When a recording is finished it might not be saved ifits recording duration is less than 1 minute
711 Immediate recording by the remote control
To record a program you are watching at present pressbutton
To pause recording press button To resume it pressbutton again
After a recording is startedpressing displays a record-ing control box like the next fig-ure in which you can specifyits duration on which it will beended
A current recording will be stopped after the time set to theDuration parameter If the information about the next pro-grams is provided through the electronic program guide theAfter this program and After next program options would beavailable Once the After this program option is selected the
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
40 Recording and Playing Back
current recording will be stopped the moment the current pro-gram ends likewise once the After next program option is se-lected the current recording will be stopped the moment thenext program ends
Selecting the Record pause command pauses recording Whenyou press button again to display the recording controlbox the Record continue command is displayed instead Se-lecting the Record continue command resumes recording
To stop recording pressbutton Then a confirmationbox like the next figure appearswhich shows the information ofprograms being recorded at themoment Select a program youwant to stop
After a recording is started you can switch over to and watchany other service during the recording To record another ser-vice additionally switch over to a service you want to recordand press button
Once a recording is started it is put on the recording file listeven though it is not finished yet The recording file is namedafter its service name with a suffix of a number To display therecording file list press button For detailed descriptionabout the recording file list refer to sect 72
712 Making a timer recording
You can make a program to be recorded at a specific timeEven If the digital receiver is off it will be turned on andstart recording at a time specified The digital receiver willbe turned off again as the recording ends
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
71 Recording a program 41
To make a timer recording se-lect the Timer Setting menuthen a timer list appears
To add a new timer entry press the button and then atimer edit box appears
You have to set the Record option to On to record a programIf this option is set to Off the digital receiver will be turnedon at a speified time but not record instead you may record aprogram with your video recorder in this case
If you want to record a radio program set the Type option toRadio Otherwise set to TV
Set the Service parameter to the service which provides theprogram you want Pressing the
currenpound iexclcentOK button on this parameterdisplays a service list in which you can select a desired service
There are 5 timer modes
One Time means literally lsquoone timersquo as it stands
Every Day means literally lsquoevery dayrsquo as it stands
Every Weekend means lsquoSaturday and Sunday per weekrsquo
Weekly means lsquoone day per weekrsquo
Every Weekday means lsquofrom Monday to Friday per weekrsquo
If your favorite program is broadcasted at weekend and youwish to record every episode of the program set the Modeoption to Every Weekend
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
42 Recording and Playing Back
Set the Date parameter to a date on which your porgram willbe recorded The date format is daymonthyearndashday of the week
Set the Start Time parameter to a time at which your programwill be recorded You can enter it with the numeral buttonsThe time format is hoursminute
Set the Duration parameter to a time after which your record-ing will be finished
The allowable maximum value is 23 hours and 55 minutes
Pressingcurrenpound iexclcentOK on the File Name parameter displays an on-screen
keyboard with which you can specify a file name for yourtimer recording If you do not specify anything it will benamed after its service name For how to use the keyboardrefer to Chapter 6
To make an entry with the above settings do press the OKcommand otherwise it will not be made
You can edit or delete a timer entry in the timer list To deletea timer entry put the highlight bar on the entry you want andpress the button To edit a timer entry put the highlightbar on the entry you want and press
currenpound iexclcentOK button then the timeredit box appears in which you can change its timer settings
713 Recording by electronic program guide
The Australian electronic pro-gram guide is provided byIceTV and your digital receivercomes with a 6 month pre-paid subscription This lets youschedule recordings by simplyclicking on the name of the pro-gram The program guide is au-tomatically fetched through theInternet
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
71 Recording a program 43
For instructions on setting up IceTV please visit httpwwwicetvcomautopfield How to set a timer recording by theprogram guide is as follows
1 Select the service you want to record
2 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentGUIDE button to display its electronic program
guide
3 Select a program you want to record Pressed thecurrenpound iexclcentOK
button one time P is marked up on the program entrypressed once more R is marked up The former indi-cates turn-on the latter indicates record-on
4 This timer recording is put on the timer list To edit thistimer recording press button then a timer edit boxappears in which you can change its timer settings
5 To remove the marking press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button once again
714 Recording when using time shift
While you are watching a program by time shift function youcan record the program by performing the following steps
1 Press button to start time shift
2 To find a desired recording position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
3 Press button to start recording
4 Press button to stop time shift
5 Press button once more to stop recording
For detailed description about time shift function refer to sect58
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
44 Recording and Playing Back
72 File list
In recording a program it is stored as a file in the built-in harddisk of the digital receiver You can choose and play back arecording file you want in the recording file list
In addition to the recording file list there are MP3 file list andTopfield Application Program (TAP) file list With the digitalreceiver you can enjoy music or audio books of MP3 formatin the same manner as playing back a recording file
For detailed description about Topfield application programrefer to Chapter 8
To see the recording file listpress button
To turn to another list pressbutton or button
In a file list a file entry is comprised of the following informa-tion file number file name recording time file size and so onYou are able to play back move delete rename and lock a fileentry in a file list You are also able to sort the file entries byfile name recording time or file size Moreover you can makea new folder
To make a new folder
To make a new folder press button Then a new foldernamed GROUP is created You can rename the folder in thesame manner as renaming a file entry
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
72 File list 45
To move a file to another folder
To move a file to another folder put the highlight bar on a fileentry you want and press button Then a folder list ap-pears Once you choose a folder in the list the file gets movedto that folder
To delete a file
To delete a file put the highlight bar on a file entry you wantand press button Then a confirmation box appears Theselected file will be deleted with the Yes reply
To sort file entries
To sort file entries perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Set the Sorting option to Alphabetic Time or Size as youwant
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
5 The file entries are sorted by the option specified
To rename a file
To rename a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 Select the Rename menu to display an on-screen key-board
4 Enter and save a file name as you want with the key-board For how to use the keyboard refer to Chapter 6
5 The file is renamed as specified
You can rename a folder in the same manner
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
46 Recording and Playing Back
To lock a recording file
To lock a file perform the following steps
1 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want
2 Press button to display an option list
3 To lock the file set the Lock option to Locked
4 To unlock the file set the Lock option to Unlocked
5 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
6 A lock symbol is displayed on the file entry
When you press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button on a locked file entry to play it
back you must enter the personal identification number spec-ified in the Parental Control menu For the Parental Controlmenu refer to sect 34
NOTE This function is available only in the recording file list
73 Playing back a recording
When recording a program all of service characteristics arerecorded as they are So in playing back a recording file youcan enjoy its audio tracks subtitle tracks and teletexts if avail-able
How to play back a recording file is as follows
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playback
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback
4 To stop playback press button
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
73 Playing back a recording 47
Circle
Once a playback is started a playback symbol likethe next figure will be displayed on the right top ofthe screen for a few seconds The outer circle of the
playback symbol indicates progress rate
During a playback you can enjoy the following tricks
bull To see the detailed information about a recording file be-ing played back press to display an information boxThe information box shows its file name broadcaster in-formation service information duration and so on
bull To pause playback press button To resume itpress button
bull To find a desired playback position press buttonor button unceasingly until you find it
bull To see a current playback position press button todisplay a progress bar To hide the progress bar press
again
You can specify a playback position entering percent with thenumeral buttons when the progress bar is hidden
731 To play back in slow motion
To play back in slow motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in3 steps 1
2 14 and 1
8 times speed To return to normal speedpress button
732 To play back in fast motion
To play back in fast motion press button on playbackWhenever pressing button playback speed changes in 3steps 2 4 and 6 times speed To return to normal speed press
button
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
48 Recording and Playing Back
The digital receiver can play back not only forward but alsobackward in fast motion To play back backward in fast mo-tion press button Whenever pressing button play-back speed changes in 3 steps 1 2 and 3 times speed To turnto forward playback press button
733 To play back recordings in sequence
The digital receiver can play back several recording files insequence To use this utility perform the following steps
1 Press button to display the recording file list
2 Select file entries you want to play back by pressingbutton
3 When a file entry is selected it is numbered
4 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start playback after selecting all
of your entries
5 The selected recording files are played back in sequencethat they are numbered
734 To make a bookmark
You can specify a playback po-sition as a bookmark withbutton and jump to the posi-tion with button You canmake 64 bookmarks at maxi-mum Bookmarks are storedwith the recording file so thatyou can use them again after-wards To use this utility per-form the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
73 Playing back a recording 49
2 To add a bookmark press button at a position youwant
3 To jump to a following bookmark press button
4 To delete a bookmark jump to the bookmark you wantand press button
When there is no preset bookmark pressing button makesa jump forward 30 seconds
735 To play back a recording repeatedly
The digital receiver can play back a recording file repeatedlyboth in whole and in part
To play back a recording file repeatedly in whole pressbutton on condition that the progress bar is hidden Then aninformation box with a repeat symbol is displayed Toquit the repeated playback press button again
To play back a recording file repeatedly in part perform thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the point starts toblink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then the blockturns to green and starts to be played back repeatedly
7 Press button to hide the progress bar
8 To withdraw the block press button on conditionthat the progress bar is displayed
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
50 Recording and Playing Back
74 Editing a recording
741 To erase a block from a recording
You can cut out a block such as commercial film from a record-ing file by performing the following steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
7 Select the Cut command then the block is erased
742 To store a block from a recording
You can store a block from a recording file by performing thefollowing steps
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Press button to display a progress bar
3 Find one end position of a block you want to specifywith button or button
4 Press button at the position then the pointer startsto blink
5 Find the other end postion
6 Press button at the position again then a confirma-tion box appears
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
75 Playing a MP3 51
7 Select the Save command then the block is stored Thestored file will named after its source file with a suffix oflsquoCUTrsquo and a number
In addition you can copy a recording file in whole or in partwhen playing back it
1 Start playback of a recording file you want
2 Find a desired position from which a copy will be startedwith button or button
3 Press button
4 Pressing button stops copying The copied file willbe named after its source file with a suffix of lsquoCOPYrsquo anda number
CircleOnce a copy is started a copying symbol like thenext figure will be displayed on the right top of thescreen for a few seconds To see copying status press
button The outer circle of the copying symbol indicatesprogress rate
NOTE If copying time is less than about 1 minute the copy-ing will not be done successfully It is recommendednot to change the playback speed
75 Playing a MP3
To play a MP3 file with the digital receiver you have to trans-fer your MP3 files to the digital receiver from your personalcomputer For how to transfer your MP3 files to the digitalreceiver refer to sect 93
To play a MP3 file perform the following steps
1 Press button and then press button orbutton to display the MP3 file list
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
52 Recording and Playing Back
2 Put the highlight bar on a file entry you want to playIf you want to play several files select them withbutton
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start play
4 To see the detailed information about a MP3 file beingplayed press to display an information box The in-formation box shows its file name album artist dura-tion and so on
5 To stop play press button
When a MP3 file is being played pressing linefigRepeatBut-ton turns around repeat mode symbol of which is displayedon the information box symbol represents that a currentMP3 file will be played repeatedly symbol represents thatall seleted MP3 files will be played repeatedly in turn
To play all MP3 files in a subfolder select a desired folder andpress button
76 Formatting hard disk
To format the hard disk of the digital receiver select the Instal-lation gt Format Hard Disk menu
Formatting the hard disk will delete all files permanently If anew hard disk drive is installed it must be formatted becausethe file system of the digital receiver is different from any ofthe personal computer You cannot use time shift and recordfunctions with an unformatted hard disk
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
53
Chapter 8
Topfield Application Program
If you are good at programming with C++ language you canmake a program executable in the digital receiver We callthis Topfield Application Program (TAP) In making a TAPit is recommended to use Diab compiler of Wind River whoseweb site address is httpwwwwindrivercom Some vari-ants of GCC compiler also might perhaps be available as acompiler for TAPs You can get the Application Program In-terface (API) libraries for TAPs from the Topfield web sitehttpwwwi-topfieldcom
Your TAPs will be run under the following conditions
bull Their extension name is tap If they have any other ex-tension name they will be ignored
bull They are in the Program Files folder If they are in otherfolders they will be ignored
For how to transfer your program to the digital receiver referto sect 93
To run a TAP in the digital receiver perform the followingsteps
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
54 Topfield Application Program
1 Press button to display the program file list
2 Place the highlight bar on a file entry you want to run
3 Press thecurrenpound iexclcentOK button to start the program
4 To exit the program press thecurrenpound iexclcentEXIT button
The figure on the left is a run-ning screen of a TAP ImageViewer which displays imagefiles of BMP GIF and JPG for-mat This TAP is available fromthe Topfieldweb site http
wwwi-topfieldcom
In the program file list you can use a variety of file controlfunctions including renaming sorting deleting and so onFor detailed descriptions about file control functions refer tosect 72
If you want a program to run automatically when the digitalreceiver starts up move the program to the Auto Start folderPress the
currenpound iexclcent0 button at start-up if you want the program not torun
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
55
Chapter 9
Firmware Update and Data
Transfer
The digital receiver has a stable and convenient firmware touse However a new firmware may be released to improvethe digital receiver You can get a latest firmware and updateutilites from the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
You should check the firmwareinformation of your digital re-ceiver before downloading anew firmware To check the cur-rent information of the digitalreceiver select the Information gt
IRD Status menu
NOTE You have to update with only the new firmware ofwhich System ID is identical to yours otherwise you
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
56 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
will fail in firmware update
91 Updating the firmware
From a computer via USB port
You can transfer a new firmware to the digital receiver fromyour computer connecting them with a USB cable You needTFDN USB the firmware transfer utility for this which is avail-able at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFDN USB from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFDN USB
How to use TFDN USB is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the
new firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start
the file transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the
file transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
91 Updating the firmware 57
From a computer via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom your computer connecting them with a RS232 cable Youneed TFD-Down the firmware transfer utility for this whichis available at the Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Download a new firmware applicable to the digital re-ceiver from the Topfield web site
2 Download TFD-Down from the Topfield web site
3 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
4 Turn on the digital receiver
5 Run TFD-Down
How to use TFD-Down is as follows
1 Presscurrenpound iexclcentFind button to select the new
firmware file
2 Presscurrenpound iexclcentDownload button to start the file
transfer
3 Presscurrenpound iexclcentStop button to cancel the file
transfer
4 Restart the digital receiver
From another digital receiver via RS232 port
It is possible to transfer a new firmware to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
58 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
To update firmware with this method perform the followingsteps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferFirmware to Other IRD menu
92 Transferring the receiver data
The digital receiver retains such data as follows
bull Service listbull Favorite listbull Preference settings
It is possible to transfer receiver data to the digital receiverfrom another same digital receiver connecting them with aRS232 cable
To transfer receiver data perform the following steps
1 Plug a RS232 cable into the RS-232 port on the digitalreceiver and the otherrsquos
2 Turn both of them on
3 Select the Installation gt Transfer Firmware gt TransferData to Other IRD menu
NOTE All of preference settings are transferred together withservice information when transferring receiver dataThis means that you will lose all of your own data SoYou had better memorize some important data suchas video settings before starting transfer to avoid re-setting them
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
93 Transferring recording files 59
93 Transferring recording files
It is possible to transfer recording files from the digital receiverto your computer connecting them by a USB cable The filetransfer program Altair is needed here which is available atthe Topfield web site httpwwwi-topfieldcom
The method is as follows
1 Download Altair from the Topfield web site
2 Plug a USB cable into the USB port on the digital re-ceiver and the corresponding port on your computer
3 Turn on the digital receiver
4 Run Altair
How to use Altair is as follows
1 Select a file to transfer The left hand list box displaysrecording files in the digital receiver and the right handlist box displays files in your computer
2 To start a transfer from the digital receiver to your com-puter press currenpound iexclcentrarr button
3 To start a transfer from your computer to the digital re-ceiver press currenpound iexclcentlarr button
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
60 INDEX
Index
Symbol16918169 Display Format191st Audio Language151st Subtitle Language152nd Audio Language152nd Subtitle Language154318
AAV Output Setting16Access Control23Add to Fav28Advanced26After next program39 40After this program39Alphabetic45Altair59ANT 1 IN10 12ANT 2 IN10 12Antenna Supply 5V25API53Application Program Interface53AUDIO LR10Auto26Auto Start54AV23
Bbrowsable service list27Button4
CC++53Censorship22Center extract19Change PIN Code23Channel26Composite Video Baseband Sig-
nal17Cut50CVBS17
DDate42Diab53Digital Video Broadcasting1Download56 57Duration39 42DVB1
EElectronic Program Guide2 30EPG2 30Euro-connector17
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
61
Every Day41Every Weekday41Every Weekend41
FFactory Setting26File Name42Find56 57folder list44Format Hard Disk52
GG22GCC53GMT20Greenwich Mean Time20
IInfo Box Display Time24Info Box Position24information box29Integrated Receiver Decoder23IRD23IRD Status55
LLanguage Setting14Letter Box19Local Time22Lock28 46Locked46
MM23MA23Manual26Menu Language14Mode21 22 41
mono19multifeed32
NNEW36No block22normal-screen television18NTSC16
Oon-screen keyboard36One Time41option list45Organizing Favorties35OSD Transparency24
PPacket Identifier26PAL16Parental Control22 46Personal Identification Num-
ber22personal identification number46PG23Picture-in-Picture34PID26PID26PIN22PiP34program file list54Program Files53progress bar47
RR23Radio41Record41Record continue40
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
62 INDEX
Record pause40recording file list44Rename28 45RF Channel20RF IN10 13RF LOOP 1 OUT10 12RF LOOP 2 OUT10 12RF OUT11 13 19RF Output19RGB17RS-23211 57 58
SS-VIDEO10 12S-Video17SPDIF11Save50SCART16Search Mode26Service41Service Search25 26Show Provider28Size45Sorting45Sound Mode19Start Time42stereo19Stop56 57subtitle32Super-Video17System ID55System Setting24
TTAP44 53teletext32television service list37TFD-Down57
TFDN USB56Time45time format22Time Offset21Time Setting20 23time shift33Time Shifting24 33timer list41Timer Setting41Topfield Application Program44
53Total block22Transfer Data to Other IRD58Transfer Firmware to Other IRD58transponder1TV10 41TV Aspect Ratio18TV Type16Type41
UUnlocked46USB11 56 59
VVCR10VCR Scart Type17 18VIDEO10Video Output17
WWeekly41wide-screen television18Wind River53
YYUV17
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
Warranty Information
Do not return this card to TOPFIELD AUSTRALIA
Equipment Details
Model Serial Number Date of Purchase
TF 5000 PVRt Masterpiece
Please keep warranty card proof of purchase and all manuals in a safe place as you will require thesewhen making a warranty claim
Ensure that the following conditions are followed when operating the equipment Failureto do so may result in warranty being void
bull Do Not place the unit in a confined cabinet or cupboard without proper ventilation
bull To prevent shock or hazard risk Do Not place Liquid or Fluids near the appliance
bull Do Not place appliance in a dusty or wet location
bull Full warranty conditions are listed on the rear of this card
bull Prior to making a claim you should read through the troubleshooting section in themanual and consult the Topfield Australia web site httpwwwtopfieldcomau
For further Warranty information or to make a claim please contact Topfield Australia on1300 889 803
12 month warranty is offered by the Manufacturer Topfield CoLtdHanseo Bldg 246-3 Seohyeon-dong Bundang-guSeongnam 463-824 Korea
Topfield Australia acts as the Service agent in Australia for the manufacturerrsquos warrantyand can be contacted on 1300 889 803
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
Warranty Conditions
1 Where required by Topfield Australia only the original invoicereceipt issued by the dealer willbe accepted as proof of purchase
2 Topfield Australia may reject warranty claims on equipment which it believes to be illegally ac-quired or when the lsquoownerrsquo is unable to provide proof of purchase or where security labels orserial numbers have been tampered with or removed
3 The warranty covers only defects in the material and workmanship of the product for a period of12 months from the date of original purchase
4 This warranty is on lsquoReturn to Basersquo basis The owner is responsible for the delivery of the equip-ment to the point of purchase and for collecting the repaired or replaced equipment from the samelocation
5 The warranty is void if failures arise as a result of any of the following i) Abuse misuse physicalimpact normal wear and tear ii) Alteration or repairs carried out without written authorizationfrom Topfield Australia iii) Upgrade that are not registered by Topfield Australia iv) Operatingor maintained other than in accordance with the manual supplied
6 This equipment will not be considered defective as a result to incompatibility with other equip-ment or accessories other than the ones supplied with the unit at the time of purchase
7 This unit should be returned in its original carton and protective packaging or alternatively ina packing suitable to prevent damage Topfield Australia will not accept any responsibility forgoods damaged whilst the goods are in transit
8 Repair or replacement under the terms of this warranty does not give the right to extension or abeginning of a new warranty period Repairs or replacements may be carried out with function-ally equivalent reconditioned parts or equivalent part Parts that have been replaced become theproperty of Topfield Australia
9 The customer acknowledges that no promise representation or undertaking has been given byTopfield Australia or its dealer in relation to equipment other than as contained in this warranty
10 A service charge will apply if the fault is not covered within the conditions of this warranty or ifthere is no fault found The charge will be based on the current market rate
11 Topfield Australia is not liable for any other loss other than the unit itself
12 Nothing contained in this warranty shall be read or applied so as to affect the right of the con-sumer in relation to the provisions of the trade practices act or other statutory rights provided bylegislation of the state or territory In the absence of applicable legislation this warranty will bepurchases sole and exclusive remedy and neither Topfield Australia nor its distributors or agentsshall be liable for any incidental or consequential damages for breach of any express or impliedwarranty of this equipment
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-
Correct disposal of this product
This marking shown on the product or its literature indicates that it shouldnot be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its working lifeTo prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncon-trolled waste disposal please separate this from other types of wastes andrecycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchasedthis product or their local government office for details of where and howthey can dispose this product for environmentally safe recycling
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and condi-tions of the purchase contract This product should not be mixed with othercommercial wastes for disposal
Topfield continues to improve the digital receiver which this guide explains So some ex-planations and illustrations in this guide could be different from the real digital receiver
Copyright copy 2006 Topfield Co Ltd Australian versionhttpwwwi-topfieldcom 110T-F8926-20A-1 Rev 2
- Front Cover
- Contents
- 1 Introduction
-
- 11 Introduction
- 12 Controlling the digital receiver
-
- 121 The front panel
- 122 The remote control
-
- 2 Installation
-
- 21 Packing contents
- 22 Safety precautions
- 23 Rear panel connections
- 24 Connecting the digital receiver
- 25 Inserting batteries in the remote control
-
- 3 Preference Settings
-
- 31 Language settings
- 32 Video and audio settings
-
- 321 Televsion standard
- 322 Color model
- 323 Video cassette recorder
- 324 Television aspect ratio
- 325 Sound mode
- 326 RF output
-
- 33 Local time setting
- 34 Parental control
- 35 Adjusting on-screen display
- 36 Enabling the time shift function
-
- 4 Service Search
-
- 41 Searching broadcasting services
- 42 Resetting to factory settings
-
- 5 Daily Usage
-
- 51 Browsing services
- 52 Viewing program information
- 53 Viewing an electronic program guide
- 54 Selecting an audio track
- 55 Selecting a subtitle track
- 56 Viewing a teletext
- 57 Selecting a multifeed service
- 58 Watching by time shift
- 59 Watching by picture in picture
-
- 6 Listing Services
- 7 Recording and Playing Back
-
- 71 Recording a program
-
- 711 Immediate recording by the remote control
- 712 Making a timer recording
- 713 Recording by electronic program guide
- 714 Recording when using time shift
-
- 72 File list
- 73 Playing back a recording
-
- 731 To play back in slow motion
- 732 To play back in fast motion
- 733 To play back recordings in sequence
- 734 To make a bookmark
- 735 To play back a recording repeatedly
-
- 74 Editing a recording
-
- 741 To erase a block from a recording
- 742 To store a block from a recording
-
- 75 Playing a MP3
- 76 Formatting hard disk
-
- 8 Topfield Application Program
- 9 Firmware Update and Data Transfer
-
- 91 Updating the firmware
- 92 Transferring the receiver data
- 93 Transferring recording files
-
- Index
- Back Cover
-